5950 Part 1-1990

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
UDC 693.814
. 669.14.018.29
@ B f i s h Standards .-I
No pan d this publicationmay be photocopiedor otherwise repmducsd w i t W the prior permision in writing d BSI
British Standard
Structural use of steelwork in building

Part 1. Code of practice for design in simple and continuous construction: hot rolled sections
Aciers de construction Partie 1. Code de bonne pratique pour la conception des ouvrages de construction simple continue : profiles lamines a chaud Stahlkonstruktion im Bauwesen Teil 1. Leitfaden fur die Vetwendung warmgewalzter Profilstahle in einfacher und Endlosbauweise
British Standards Institution
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Contents
Page Foreword Committees responsible Code of practice Section one. General Page Limiting proportions of cross sections General Classification of cross sections Classification of elements Webs of semi-compact sections Compound flanges Longitudinally stiffened flanges Slender cross sections General Sections with thin webs required to carry shear Webs subject to moments and axial loads and circular hollow sections Other elements Section four. Design of structural elements
5
Back cover
1.0 1.0.1 1.0.2 1.0.3 11 . 12 . 1.3 14 . 1.5 16 . 17 .
Introduction Aims of economical structural design Overall stability Accuracy of calculation Scope Definitions Major symbols Other materials Design documents Detailing References to BS 5400
6 6 6 6
16 1 6 1 6 18 18 18 18 18 18
8 41 . 411 .. 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2 421 .. 4.2.2 423 .. 4.2.4 425 .. 4.2.6
Section two. Limit state design General principles and design methods Limit state concept Methods of design Loading General Dead, imposed and wind loading Dynamic loads and impact effects Temperature effects Ultimate limit states Limit state of strength Stability limit state Fatigue Brittle fracture Structural integrity Serviceability limit states Deflection Durability Section three. Properties of materials and section properties
General Scope Class of cross section Design strength Members in bending General Full lateral restraint Shear Elastic shear stress Moment capacity with low shear load Moment capacity with high shear load
Lateral torsional buckling General Lateral restraints Torsional restraints Destabilizing load Effective lengths of beams Effective lengths of cantilevers Lateral torsional buckling resistance of members subject to bending 4.3.8 Buckling resistance moment for single angles
31 . 3.1.I 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2 321 .. 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.3 3.3.1 332 .. 3.3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3
General Strength of steel Other properties of steel Steel castings and forgings Welds and fasteners Welding consumables Ordinary bolts, nuts and washers Friction grip fasteners Section properties Gross section Net area Effective area at connections Deductions for holes Hole area Holes not staggered Staggered holes
44 . Plate girders 4 4 1 General .. 4.4.2 .pimensions of webs and flanges 4 4 3 Besign strength of components .. 4.4.4 Moment capacity 445. Shear buckling resistance of thin webs ..: 4 4 6 . Design of intermediate transverse web ..:
stiffeners Web bearing, buckling and stiffener design General Load carrying stiffeners Bearing stiffeners Design of load carrying stiffeners Design of bearing stiffeners Design of diagonal stiffeners Design of tension stiffeners Torsion stiffeners 4.5.9 Connection to web of load carrying and bearing stiffeners 4.5.10 Connection to flanges: stiffeners in tension
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Page
Page Section five. Continuous construction
4 5 1 1 Connection to flanges: stiffeners in ..

compression
4.5.12 Hollow sections Axially loaded tension members 4.6 4.6.1 Tension capacity 4.6.2 Eccentric connections 4.6.3 Effective areas of simple tension members 4.6.4 Laced or battened ties 4.7 Compression members 1 4.7.1 General 4.7.2 Effective lengths 4.7.3 Slenderness 4.7.4 Compression resistance 4.7.5 Compressive strength 4.7.6 Eccentric connections 1 4.7.7 Columns in simple construction 4.7.8 Laced struts 4.7.9 Battened struts ( 4.7.10 Angle, channel and T-section struts 4.7.11 Batten-starredangle struts 4.7.12 Battened parallel angle struts 4.7.13 Back-to-backstruts 4.8 Axially loaded members with moments 4.8.1 General 4.8.2 Tension members with moments 4.8.3 Compression members with moments 4.9 Members with biaxial moments 4.10 Empirical design rules for members in lattice
frames and trusses
55 55 55 55 55 55 56 56 56 56 56 57 57 67 67 67 68 68 69
69
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2 5.3 531 .. 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7
General Scope Loading Classification of multi-storey frames as sway or non-sway Elastic design Plastic design General Type of loading Grades of steel Geometrical properties Restraints Stiffeners at hinge locations Fabrication restrictions Continuous beams Elastic design Plastic design Portal frames General Elastic design Plastic design Multi-storey rigid frames: elastic design General Non-sway frames Sway frames Subframes
79 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 80 80 80
69 72 72 72 72 73 73 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 75 75 76 76 76 76 77 77 77 77 77 78 78 5.7 571 .. 5.7.2 5.7.3
4 1 1 Additional provisions for gantry girders . 4 1 1 . General . I 4.1 1.2 Crabbing of trolley 4.1 1.3 Lateral torsional buckling 4.1 1.4 Shear buckling 4.1 1.5 Local compression under wheels 4.1 1 6 Welded girders . 4.12 Purlins and side rails 4.12.1 General 4.12.2Deflections 4.12.3Wind loading 4.12.4 Empirical design of purlins and side rails 4.13 Column bases 4.13.1 General 4.13.2 Empirical design of baseplates 4.13.3 Connection of baseplates 4.14 Cased sections 4.14.1 General 4.14.2Cased members subject to bending 4.14.3Cased struts 4.14.4 Cased members subject to axial load and
moment
Multi-storey rigid frames: plastic design General Non-sway frames Sway frames
83 83 83 83
Section six. Connections General recommendations General lntersections Joints in simple construction Joints in rigid construction Joints in semi-rigidconstruction Joints subjkt to vibration and/or load reversal Splices y. ~astener ipacing and edge distances Minimum spacing Maximum spacing in unstiffened plates Minimum edge and end distances Maximum edge distances Ordinary bolting Effective areas of bolts Shear capacity Bearing capacity Long joints Large grip lengths Bolts subject to tension Friction grip fasteners General
4.15 Web openings 4.15.1 General 4.15.2 Sections other than castellated 4.15.3 Castellated beams
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Page Parallel shank friction grip fasteners Waisted shank fasteners: slip resistance Friction grip fasteners subject to external tension Combined shear and tension Holes for friction grip fasteners Pin connections General Tension members and pin plates Design of pins Weld detail and design General Details of fillet welds Partial penetration butt welds Welded details for structural hollow sections Design of fillet welds Design of butt welds Holding-down bolts Section seven. Loading tests 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 General Test conditions Test procedures Test loads Preliminary loading Acceptance test Strength test Test to failure Check tests
Page
Appendices
A Formal statement of safety factor format adopted in BS 5950 : Part 1 to facilitate correlation with I S 0 2394 and BS 5400 : Part 3 B Lateral torsional buckling of members subject to bending C Compression strength: Perry strut formula D Effective lengths of struts in simple construction E Effective lengths of struts in rigid frames F Frame instability G Design of restrained members with an unrestrained compression flange H Web buckling
Tables 1 Limit states
9
10 11 12 14 15 17 19 23
2 Load factors and combinations

3 Factor K for location of material and tens~le stress 4 Maximum thickness for adequate notch thickness of parts subject to applied tensile stress 5 Deflection limits other than for pitched roof portal frames 6 Design strengths. P I 7 Limiting width to thickness ratios 8 Strength reduction factors for slender elements 9 Effective length, L E , for beams
10 Effective length, L E ,for cantilever of length L 11 Bending strength,^,, (in N/mm2) for rolled sections 12 Bending strength,pb, (in N/mm2) for welded sections 13 Use of m and n factors for members of uniform section 14 Slenderness factor v for flanged beams of uniform section 15 Slenderness correction factor, n. for members with applied loading substantially concentrated within the middle fifth of the unrestrained length 16 Slenderness correction factor, n, for members with applied loading other than a for table 15 s 17 Moment diagram between adjacent points of lateral restraint 18 Equivalent uniform moment factor, m 19 Bending strength,^,, (in N/mm2) for rolled sections with equal flanges (a) Py = 265 N/mmz (b) Py = 275 ~ / m m ~ (c) Py = 340 ~ / m m ~ (d) Py = 355 N/mm2 20 Slenderness correction factor, n, for standard load conditions 21 Critical shear strength, q,, (in N/mm2) (a) p, = 265 N/mm2 (b) p = 275 N/mmz , (c) p, = 340 N/mm2 (dl p, = 355 N/mm2 22 Basic shear strength, q b (in N/mm2 ) (a) p, = 265 N/mm2 (b) p = 275 ~ I m m ' , P = 340 N/mmz , (c) . (d) p, = 355 N/mm2 23 Flange dependent shear strength factor, qf (in Nlmm21 (a) p, = 260 N/mm2 (b) p = 275 N/mm2 , (c) p, = 340 N/mm2 (dl o, = 355 N/mm2 24 Nominakffective length, L E V a strut for 25 Strut table selection 26 Typeof section obtained for table 25 27 Compkessive strength, PC,(in N l m m 2 ) for struts 28 Angle, channel and T-section struts 29 Empirical values for purlins 30 Empirical values for side rails 31 Minimum edge and end distances to fasteners 32 Strength of bolts in clearance holes 33 Bearing strength on connected parts for ordinary bolts in clearance holes, p,, 34 Bearing strength on parts connected by parallel shank friction grip fasteners,~,, 35 Maximum dimensions of holes 36 Design strength, p , 37 Comparison of partial safety factors 38 Limiting h for box sections of uniform wall thickness, including RHS 39 Equivalent uniform moment factor, m ,
24
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Page Figures Staggered holes Angles with holes in both legs Dimensions of sections Effective shear area of typical sections 5 End panel designed not using tension field action 6 End panel designed using tension field action (single stiffener) 7 End panel designed using tension field action (double stiffener) 8 Stiff bearing length 9 Dimensions of castellated sections 10 Haunch restraints 11 Subframes 1laMinimum edge and end distances 12 Joint length at splice 13 Pinended tension members 14 Welded end connections 15 Symmetrical fillet welds 16 Dimensions for symmetrical plate girders 17 Side stanchion 18 Side stanchion with restraints 19 Simple side stanchion with crane gantry
Page
1 2 3 4
20 21 22 23
24
25
26
27 28 29
30 31
32
Compound side stanchion with crane gantry Compound vallejt stanchion with crane gantry Restraint coefficients for limited frame Effective length ratio L E I L for a column in a rigid-jointed frame braced against sidesway for k3 =Effective length ratio L E I L for a column in a rigid-jointed frame with unrestricted sidesway fork, = 0 Effective length ratio L E / L for a column in a rigid-jointed frame with partial sway bracing of relative stiffness k, = 1 Effective length ratio L E I L for a column in a rigid-jointed frame with partial sway bracing of relative stiffness k j = 2 Critical buckling mode of frame braced against sidesway Critical buckling mode of frame free to sway Members restrained on tension flange Typical haunch Value of 0, Intermediate moments
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990
Foreword
This Part of BS 5950 has been prepared under the direction of the Civil Engineering and Building Structures Standards Policy Committee. This Part of BS 5950 replaces BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1985 which is withdrawn. BS 5950 i s a document combining codes of practice to cover the design construction and fire protection of steel structures and specifications for materials, workmanship and erection. This edition introduces technical changes but it does not reflect a full review or revision of the standard, which will be undertaken in due course. The changes introduced are indicated by a single side line i n the margin of the page.
This Part does not apply to other steel structures for which appropriate British Standards exist. I t has been assumed in the drafting of this British Standard that the execution of its provisions i s entrusted to appropriately qualified and experienced people and that construction and supervision should be carried out by capable and experienced organizations. The full list of organizations who have taken part in the work of the Technical Committee i s given on the back cover. The Chairman of the Committee i s Mr P R Brett and the following people have made a particular contribution in the drafting of the code. Mr P A Rutter Mr P H Allen Mr B Auger Mr R J Campion Mr E F Hole Mr B L Hurst Mr J C Kalra Mr E G Lovejoy Dr D B Moore Prof. D A Nethercot Dr M H Ogle Mr P R Salter Dr J E Spindel Mr R Taggart Mr J C Taylor Mr A D Weller Dr F J Whitbread Vice-chairman
BS 5950 comprises the following Parts: Part 1 Code of practice for design in simple and continuous construction: hot rolled sections Part 2 Specification for materials, fabrication and erection: hot rolled sections Part 3 Design in composite construction Section 3.1 Code of practice for design of simple and continuous composite beams 'Section 3.2 Code of practice for design of composite columns and frames Part 4 Code of practice for design of floors with profiled steel sheeting Part 5 Code of practice for design of cold formed sections Part 6'Code of practice for design in light gauge sheeting, decking and cladding Part 7'Specification for materials and workmanship: cold formed sections Part 8 Code of practice for fire resistant design Part 9' Code of practice for stressed skin design Part 1 gives recommendations for the design of structural steelwork in simple and continuous construction and its provisions apply to the majority of structures, although i t is recognized that cases will arise when other proven methods of design may be more appropriate.
Compliance with a British Standard does not of itself confer immunity from legal obligations.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section one
Section one. General
1.0 Introduction
1.0.1 Aims of economical structural design
The aim of structural design i s t o provide, with due regard to economy, a structure capable of fulfilling its intended function and sustaining the design loads for its intended life. The design should facilitate fabrication, erection and future maintenance. The structure should behave as one three-dimensional entity. The layout of i t s constituent parts, such as foundations, steelwork, connections and other structural components should constitute a robust and stable structure under normal loading to ensure that in the event of misuse or accident, damage will not be disproportionate to the cause. To achieve this i t is necessary to define clearly the basic structural anatomy by which the loads are transmitted to the foundations. Any features of the structure which have a critical influence on i t s overall stability can then be identified and taken account of in design. Each part of the structure should be sufficiently robust and insensitive to the effects of minor incidental loads applied during service that the safety of other parts i s not prejudiced. Reference should be made to 2.4.5. While the ultimate strength requirements within this standard are to be regarded as limiting values, the purpose in design should be to reach these limits in as many parts of the structure as possible, to adopt a layout such that maximum structural efficiency i s attained and to rationalize the steel member sizes and details in order to obtain the optimum combination of material and fabrication.
1.2 Definitions
For the purposes of this Part of BS 5950, the following definitions apply. 1.2.1 beam. A member predominately subject to bending.
1.2.2 brittle fracture. Brittle failure of steel at low temperature. 1.2.3 buckling resistance. Limlt of force or moment which a member can withstand without buckling. 1.2.4 built-up. Constructed by interconnecting more than one plate to form a single member. 1.2.5 cantilever. A beam which i s fixed at one end and i s free to deflect at the other. 1.2.6 capacity. Limit of force or moment which may be applied without causing failure due to yielding or rupture. 1.2.7 column. A vertical member of a structure carrying axial load and possibly moments. 1.2.8 compact cross section. A cross section which can develop the plastic moment capacity of the section but in which local buckling prevents rotation at constant moment. 1.2.9 compound section. Constructed by interconnecting one or more sections or plates and sections to form a single member. 1.2.10 dead load. All loads of constant magnitude and position that act permanently, including self welght. 1.2.11 design strength. The yield strength of the material multiplied by the appropriate partial factor. See 3.1.1. 1.2.12 dynamic load. Part of an imposed load resulting from motion. 1.2.13 edge distance. Distance from the centre of a fastener hole to the nearest edge of an element. 1.2.14 effective length. Length between points of effective restraint of a member multiplied by a factor to take account of the end conditions and loading. 1.2.15 elastic design,Qeslgn which assumes no redlstribu tion of moments due 8 plastic rotation of a section throughout the structure.
5.
1.0.2 Overall stability

The designer responsible for the overall stability of the structure should ensure the compatibility of design and details of parts and components. There should be no doubt of this responsibility for overall stability when some or all of the design and details are not made by the same designer.
1.0.3 Accuracy of calculation

For the purpose of deciding whether a particular rule of the standard is complied with, the final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis should be rounded off. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as the value given in this standard.
1.2.16 empirical method. Simplified method of design justified by experience or testing. 1.2.17 end distance. Distance from the centre of a fastener hole to the edge of an element parallel to the direction in which the fastener bears. 1.2.18 factored load. Specified load multiplied by the relevant partial factor. 1.2.19 fatigue. Damage to a structural member caused by repeated application of stresses that are insuffic~ent to cause failure by a single application. 1.2.20 foundation. Part of a structure whlch distributes load directly to the ground. 1.2.21 friction grip connection. A bolted connection which relies on frictlon to transmit shear between components.
1.1 Scope
This Part of BS 5950 gives recommendations for the design of structural steelwork with hot rolled steel sections, flats. plates and hollow sections in buildings and allied structures not specifically covered by other standards.
NOTE I . These recommendat~ons assume thar the standards of mater~als and constructfion are as specfifiedfin BS 5950 : Part 2 . NOTE 2 . The publicat~ons referred to in rhis standard are listed on
the inside back cover

1.2.41 strength. Resistance to fallure by y ~ e l d ~ or g r~ buckling 1.2.42 strut. A member of a structure carrylng predomt nant!y compressive axtal load. 1.2.43 subframe. Parr of a larger frame 1.2.22 H-section. A section with one central web and two equal flanges which has an overall depth not greater than 1.2 times the width of the flange. 1.2.23 hybrid. Composed of elements of more than one strength grade of steel. 1.2.24 I-section. Section with central web and two equal flanges which has an overall depth greater than 1.2 times the width of the flange. 1.2.25 imposed load. Load on a structure or member, other than wind load,produced by the external environment and intended occupancy or use. 1.2.26 instability. Inability to carry further load due to vanishing stiffness. 1.2.27 lateral restraint
Fora beam. Restraint which prevents lateral movement of the compression flange. For a compression member. Restraint which prevents lateral movement of the member in a particular plane.
1.2.44 transverse. D~rectlon perpendicular to the stronger of the rectangular axes of the member.
1.2.45 ultimate limit s t a t e . That state w h ~ th exceeded f can cause col!apse of part or whole of the structure
1.2.46 design grade. Designation used t o define specific performance requirements of the material for design purposes, in particular strength and toughness. 1.2.47 product grade. Designation used t o define mechanical and chemical properties and manufacturing requirements of the material as specified in BS 5950 : Part 2.'
1.3 Major symbols

A A, Ag A, A, A,
a Area Effective area Gross area Shear area (bolts) Tensile stress area (bolts) Shear area (sections) Spacing of transverse stiffeners or Effective throat size of weld Breadth Outstand or Width of panel Stiff bearing length Charpy impact value Depth of section or Diameter of section or Diameter of hole Depth of web or Nominal diameter of fastener Modulus of elasticity of steel End distance Compressive force due to axial load Shear force (bolts) Tensile force S b r force (sections) ~dm~ressive stress due t o axial load Shear stress Shear modulus of steel Warping constant of section Storey height Second moment of area about the major axis Second moment of area about the minor axis Torsion constant of section Length of span Effective length Larger end moment Ma, Maximum buckling moment about the major or minor axis in the presence of axial load Buckling resistance moment (lateral torsional) M,,,M,, Moment capacity of section about the major and minor axes in the absence of axial load
1.2.28 longitudinal. Along the length of the member. 1.2.29 pattern loading. Loading arranged in such a manner as to give the most severe effect on a particular element. 1.2.30 pitch. Distance between centres of fasteners lying in the direction of stress. 1.2.31 plastic cross section. A cross section which can develop a plastic hinge with sufficient rotation capacity to allow redistribution of bending moments within the structure. 1.2.32 plastic design. Design method assuming redistribu. tion of moment in continuous construction. 1.2.33 plastic moment. Moment capacity allowing for redistribution of stress within a cross section. 1.2.34 pretensioned fastener. Fastener tensioned to a specified proportion of its proof stress before connected components are loaded. 1.2.35 semi-compact cross section. A cross section in which the stress in the extreme fibres should be limited to yield because local buckling would prevent development of the plastic moment capacity in the section. 1.2.36 serviceability limit states. Those limit states which when exceeded can lead to the structure being unfit for its intended use. 1.2.37 slender cross section. A cross section in which yield of the extreme fibres cannot be attained because of premature local buckling. 1.2.38 slenderness. The effective length divided by the radius of gyration. 1.2.39 slip resistance. L ~ m iof shear that can be applied t before slip occurs in a friction grip connection. 1.2.40 stability. Resistance of the structure or part of the structure to overturning or overall failure.
B
b
bI
Elastic critical moment Mid-length moment on a simply supported span equal to the unrestrained length Reduced moment capacity of the section about the major and minor axes in the presence of axial load Applied moment about the major and minor axes Equivalent uniform moment about the major and minor axes Equivalent uniform moment factor Slenderness correction factor Bearing capacity of a bolt Bearing capacity of parts connected by friction grip fasteners Bearing capacity of parts connected by ordinary bolts
Torsional index of sect~on Specified minimum yield strength of steel Elastic modulus about major and minor axes Coefficient of linear thermal expansion Modular ratio Ratio of smaller to larger end moment Overall load factor Load variation factor, i.e. function of y ~ and y r 2 , Material strength factor Ratio M/Mo, i.e. the ratio of the larger end moment to the mid-length moment on a simply supported span equal to the unrestrained length Deflection constant
(-d;)
275
'I2
PC
Pcx,Pcy
Compression resistance Compression resistance considering buckling about the major and minor axes only Shear capacity of a bolt Slip resistance provided by a friction grip fastener Tension capacity of a member or fastener Shear capacity of a section Bending strength Bearing strength of a bolt Bearing strength of parts connected by friction grip fasteners Bearing strength of parts connected by ordinary bolts Compressive strength Euler strength Shear strength of a bolt Tension strength of bolt Design strength of a fillet weld Design strength of steel Basic shear strength of a web panel Critical shear strength of web panel Elastic critical shear strength of web panel Flange dependent shear strength factor
fy
A,, hLo XO p .
Slenderness, i.e. the effective length divided by the radius of gyration Elastic critical load factor Limiting equivalent slenderness Equivalent slenderness Limiting slenderness Slip factor Poisson's ratio
P, P,, PC p~
Pb
P bb p p bs PC PE Ps
1.4 Other materials

Where other structural materials are used in association with steelwork they should comply with the appropriate British Standard. NOTE. A t t e n t i o n is drawn t o the necessity of referring to local
regulations.
Pt
Pw
1.5 Design documents

The design documentsshould contain sufficient information to enable the design to be detailed and the structure fabricated and erected. The design documen@ should show the assumed behaviour of the structure, the design assumptions and whether the forces and reactiorh included are factored or unfactored.
pv
Qb
Qr c
Qe
9f
rx
Radius of gyration of a member about i t s major and minor axes Plastic modulus about the major and minor axes Leg length of a fillet weld Thickness of a flange or leg Thickness of a web or As otherwise defined in a clause Specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of the steel Buckling parameter of the section Shear buckling resistance of stiffened web utilizing tension field action
s x
, Sv
1.6 Detailing
The connections between members should withstand the forces and moments to which they will be subjected, without undue deformation and without invalidating the design assumptions. The detailing of the connections should take account of possible dimensional variations due to rolling margins and fabrication variations, leading to some degree of lack of fit.
s
T t
U,
u
Vb
Vc,
1.7 References to BS 5400
Shear buckling resistance of stiffened or unst~ffened In BS 5400 the breakdown of partial safety factors, web without utilizing tension field action the assessment of material strengths, etc. are different, Slenderness factor for beam and these differences should be recognized.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section t w o
Section two. Limit state design
2.1 General principles and design methods

2.1.1 Limit state concept Structures should be designed by considering the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use, by applying appropriate factors for the ultimate limit state and the ser-viceability limit state. Examples of limit states relevant to steel structures are given in table 1. Table 1. Limit states
Ultimate Serviceability
2.1.2.3 Rigid design. The connections are assumed to be capable of developing the strength and/or stiffness required by an analysis assuming full continuity. Such analysis may be made using either elastic or plastic methods. 2.1.2.4 Semi-rigid design. Some degree of connection stiffness is assumed, but insufficient to develop full continuity as follows. (a) The moment and rotation capacity of the joints should be based on experimental evidence, which may permit some limited plasticity providing the ultimate tensilecapacity of the fastener is not the failure criterion On this basis, the design should satisfy the strength, stability and stiffness requirements of all parts of the structure when partial continuity at the joints is to be taken into account in assessing moments and forces in the members. (b) As an alternative, in simple beam and column structures an allowance may be made for the interrestraint of the connections between a beam and a column by an end restraint moment not exceeding 10 % of the free moment applied to the beam, assuming this t o be simply supported. provided that the following apply.
1 Strength (including general yielding, rupture, buckling and transformation into a mechan~sm)
2 Stability against overturning and sway
5 Deflection
6 Vibration (e.9. wind

induced oscillation)
7 Repairable damage due to fatigue
3 Fracture due to fatigue

4 Brittle fracture
8 Corrosion and
durability
The overall factor in any design has to cover variability of:
is taken as 1.0 (see 3.1.1). Depending on the type of load, values of yk and y, are assigned. The product of yp and y i s the factor , yf, by which the specified loads are to be multiplied in checking the strength and stability of a structure (see table 2).
Ym Loading: Yu Structural performance: y, In this code the material factor, y,,

Material strength:
(1 ) The beams and columns are designed by the general rules applicable to simple design.
(2) The frame is provided with lateral support or braced against sidesway in both directions.
(3) The beams are designed for the maximum net moment which includes an allowance for the restraint moment at one or both ends.
(4) Each column i s designed to resist the algebraic sum of the restraint moments from the beams at the same level on each side of the column, in addition to moments due to eccentricity of connections.
A deta~led breakdown of y factors is given in appendix A.

2.1.2 Methods of design 2.1.2.1 General. The design of any structure or its parts may be carried out by one of the methods given in 2.1.2.2 to 2.1.2.5. In all cases, the details of members and connections should be such as to realize the assumptions made in design without adversely affecting any other parts of the structure.
(5) The assumed end restraint moment need not, however, be taken as 10 % of the free moment for all beams, provided that the same restraint moment is used in the design of the column and beam at each conyection.
(6) l%e beam-to-column connections are designed to transmit the appropriate restraint moment, in addition to'lhe end reactions assuming the beams are simply supported. (7) The welds and fasteners should be designed for
the actual moment capacity of the connection not the assumed moment.
2.1.2.2 Simple design. The connections between members are assumed not to develop moments adversely affecting either the members or the structure a a whole. s
The distribution of forces may be determined assuming that members cntersecting at a joint are pin connected. The necessary flexibility in connections may result in some nonelastic deformation of the materials, other than the fasteners. I t i s necessary to maintain stability against sway and the provisions of 2.4.2.3 apply.
2.1.2.5 Experimental verification. Where design of a

structure or element by calculation in accordance with any of the preceding methods i s not practicable, or is inappropriate, the strength, stability and stiffness may be confirmed by loading tests in accordance with section seven.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section two
2.2 Loading
2.2.1 General All relevant loads should be considered separately and in such realistic combinations a to comprise the most critical s effects on the elements and the structure a a whole. s The magnitude and frequency of fluctuating loads should also be considered.
Loading conditions during erection should receive particular attention. Settlement of supports may need to be taken into account.
Table 2. Load factors and combinations

Loading Factor,
yf
Dead load Dead load restraining uplift or overturning Dead load acting with wind and imposed loads combined Imposed load Imposed load acting with wind load Wind load Wind load acting with imposed load or crane load Forces due to temperature effects
1.4 1.0 1.2 1.6 1.2 1.4 1.2 1.2
2.2.2 Dead, imposed and wind loading
Reference should be made to BS 6399 : Part 1, BS 6399 : Part 3 and C 3 : Chapter V : Part 2 for the determination P of the dead, imposed and wind loads.
Crane loading effects
2.2.3 Dynamic loads and impact effects

These may be determined from of cranes.
BS 6399 : Part 1 in the case
Vertical load Vertical load acting with horizontal loads (crabbing or surge) Horizontal load Horizontal load acting with vertical Crane load acting with wind load"
1.6 1.4 1.6 1.4 1.2
It is recommended that values for cranes of loading class Q3 and Q4 a defined in BS 2573 : Part 1 should be established s in consultation with the crane manufacturer.
2.3 Temperature effects

Where, in the design and erection of a structure, i t i s necessary to take account of changes in temperature, it may be assumed that in the UK the average temperature of C internal steelwork varies from - 5 O C to +35 O . The actual dependsOn the locationr type and purpose range* of the structure and special consideration may be necessary for structures in other conditions, and in locations abroad subjected to different temperature ranges.
'When considering wind or imposed load and crane loading acting together the value of yf for dead load may be taken as 1.2.
Where a structure or member is subiect to loads from two more cranes the crane loads should be taken as the maximum vertical and horizontal loads actingsimuItaneously where this is reasonably possible.
2.4.2 Stability limit state 2.4.2.1 General. In considering the overall stability of any structure or part, the loads should be increased by the relevant yf factors given in table 2.
The designer should consider overall frame stability which embraces stability aMnst overturning and sway stability. .. .
2.4 Ultimate limit states

2.4.1 Limit state of strength 2.4.1.1 General. In checking the strength and stability of the structure the loads should be multiplied by the relevant yf factors given in table 2. The factored loads should be applied in the most unfavourable realistic combination for the part or effect under consideration.
The load capacity of each member and its connections, a determined by the relevant provisions of this standard, s should be such that the factored loads would not cause failure.
2.4.2.2 Stability agahst overturning. The factored loads, considered separatqy and in combination, should not cause the structure or any; part of the structure (including the foundations) to overturn or lift off its seating. The combin. ation of dead, imposed and wind loads should be such a to s have the most severe effect on overall stability (see 2.2.1 ).
Account should be taken of probable variations in dead load during construction or other temporary conditions.
I
I
2.4.1.2 Overhead travelling cranes. The -yf factors given in table 2 for vertical loads from overhead travelling cranes should be applied to the dynamic crane loads. i.e. the static vertical wheel loads increased by the appropriate allowance for dynamic effects (see 2.2.3).
For cranes on outdoor gantries the wind loads on the gantry and supporting structure should be obtained from: (a) BS 2573 : Part 1, for cranes in the working condition; (b)CP 3 : Chapter V : Part 2, for cranes which are not working.
2.4.2.3 Sway stability. All structures, including portions between expansion joints, should have adequate stiffness againstsway.
To ensure this, in addition to designing for applied horizontal loads, a separate check should be carried out
These notional forces may arise from practical imperfections such a lack of verticality and should be taken a the greater s s of: 1 % of factored dead load from that level, applied horizontally;
2.4.4 Brittle fracture 2.4.4.1 General. Brittle fracture need not be considered except in locations subject to tensile stresses in service due to applied axial load or moment. Where such tension exists then the maximum thickness may be determined from 2.4.4.2 if the service temperature does s not fall below that normal in the UK, taken a --5 O C for internal conditions and - 15 O C for external conditions. Where the steel is subjected to lower temperatures or where the steel grade or thickness used is not covered by table 4 then the energy absorption should comply with 2.4.4.3, which may also be used in place of table 4. Where severe restraint conditions occur due to welding then reference should be made to BS 5400 or specialist advice.
The recommendations of this clause do not apply to grade 43A base plates (see 4.13).
I
I
0.50 % of factored load (dead plus vertical imposed) from that level, applied horizontally. These notional forces should be assumed to act in any one direction at a time and should be applied at each roof and floor level or their equivalent. They should be taken a s acting simultaneously with the factored dead plus vertical imposed loads taken as: 1.4 X (unfactored dead load); and
1.6 X (unfactored vertical imposed load).
The notional force should not: (a) be applied when considering overturning;
1
I
(b) be combined with the applied horizontal loads; (c) be combined with temperature effects; (d) be taken to contribute to the net reactions a t the foundations. Sway stability may be provided for example by braced frames, joint rigidity or by utilizing staircase, lift cores and shear walls. Whatever system i s used, reversal of loading should be accommodated. The cladding floors and roof should have adequate strength and be so secured to the structural framework as to transmit all horizontal forces to the points of sway resistance. Where such sway stability is provided by construction other than the steel framework. the steelwork designer should state clearly the need for such construction and the forces acting upon i t (see 1.5).
2.4.4.2 Maximum thickness. The maximum thickness for adequate notch toughness should not exceed the value given in table 4 for the value of K determined from table 3.
2.4.4.3 Energy absorption. The Charpy impact value, C,, in joules, at the minimum service temperature should not be less than:
A
I
Y,t
710K
where
Y , is the minimum yield strength of the material (in ~/mrn');

t
2.4.2.4 Foundation design. The design of foundations should be in accordance with BS 8004 and should accommodate all the forces imposed on them. Attention should be given to the method of connecting the steel superstructure to the foundations and the anchorage of any holding down bolts a recommended in 6.7. s
Where i t i s necessary t6 quote the foundation reactions i t should be clearly stated whether the forces and moments result from factored or unfactored loads. Where they result from factored loads the relevant yf factors for each load in each combination should be stated.
i s the thickness of material from which the specimen is taken (in mm):
K i s determined from table 3.

Table 3. Factor K for location of material and tensile stress
Tensile str& due to factored loads a\the locatiow.being considered Welded location Unreamad punched holes Nonwddd location Drilled or reamed holes
2.4.3 Fatigue
Fatigue need not be considered unless a structure or element is subjected to numerous significant fluctuations of stress. Stress changes due to fluctuations in wind loading need not be considered but account should be taken of wind induced oscillations.
< 100
N/rnm2
2
1
2 1
> 100
In the design of crane supporting structures only those members which support cranes of utilization classes U4 to U9 as defined in BS 2573 need be checked for fatigue by reference to 8s 5400 : Part 10. When designingfor fatigue a yf factor of 1.0 should be used.
2.4.5 Structural integrity 2.4.5.1 Requirements for a// StrUCtUreS. All Structures should follow the principles given in 1.0.1. The additional requirements in 2.4.5.2 to 2.4.5.5 apply to buildings.
Section
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 two
Table 4. M a x i m u m thickness f o r adequate n o t c h toughness o f parts subject t o applied tensile stress (see notes 1 t o 6) Design grade Internal conditions
K= 1
External conditions
K=2
NOTE 1. For sections with flanges the thickness is the flange thickness defined in the relevant British Standard.
K=1
mm
=
mm
mm
mm
43A 438 43B(T) 43C 43 D 43DD 43E 43EE 50A 508 50B(TI 50C 500 5000 50E 50EE
25 25 30 60
50 50 60
20 20 25 45 100
40 40 50 90
15 15 20 40 90
30 30 40 80
25 25 32 60
12 12 16 30 70 100
NOTE 2. The relevant structural steel standard may require Charpy values t o be agreed for certain product grades and thicknesses. NOTE 3. Where no value is shown, the maximum thickness for adequate notch toughness may be assumed t o be in excess of 100 mm. NOTE 4. The inclusion of a thickness limit in the table does not necessarily imply that steel of that thickness can be supplied t o that design grade in all product forms. NOTE 5. For design grades 43BIT) and 50BITI. verification of the impact properties of quality B by testing should be specified under option 7 of BS EN 10025 when the steel i s ordered. NOTE 6. The maximum thickness values are based on a minimum Charpy value of 27 J* at the following test temperatures. Design grades 43-50 and 55 Test temperature Quality
A
"C (no test)

+20 0 -20
50F
55C 55EE 55F WR5OA WR508 WR5OC
25
50
35
70
8 C D DD E EE
F
-30'
-40 -50 -60
Lksign grado WR 50 Quality

A
45 45 85
90 90
30 30 55
60 60
Test temperature "C
o
0 -15
B C
For Fe 510 DD, BS EN 10025 specifies 40 J at -=O'C, which is accepted as equivalent to 27 J at - 3 0 OC.
2.4.5.2 Requirements for all buildings. Every b u i l d i n g

frame should be effectively tied together a t each princcpal floor and r o o f level. All columns should b e effectively restrained in t w o directions approximately a t r i g h t angles a t each principal f l o o r o r r o o f w h i c h they support.
This anchorage m a y be provided b y either beams o r tie members. Where poss~ble these should be arranged i n continuous lines as close as practicable t o the columns and should t o each edge. A t re-entrant corners the peripheral t ~ e be anchored i n t o the steel framework.
Ties may be either steel members or steel reinforcement embedded in concrete or masonry provided that they are properly anchored to the steel framework. Steel members provided for other purposes may be utilized as ties. When checked as ties other loading may be ignored. Beams designed to carry the floor or roof loading will generally be suitable provided that their end connections are capable of resisting tension. All ties and their end connections should be of a standard of robustness commensurate with the structure of which they form a part and should be capable of carrying a factored tensile load of not less than 75 k N at floors or 40 k N at roof level. Ties are not required at a roof level where steelwork supports cladding weighing not more than 0.7 kN/m2 and carries roof loads only. Where a building i s provided with expansion joints, each section between expansion joints should be treated as a separate building for the purpose of this clause.
( 2 ) At theperiphery. Ties anchoring columns at the periphery of a floor or roof should be checked for the force given in ( 1 ) but not less than 1 % of the factored vertical load in the column at that level.
(c) Columns. All column splices should be capable of resisting a tensile force of not less than two-thirds of factored vertical load applied to the coluinn from the floor level next below the splice. Except where the steel framework i s of continuous construct~on at least one direction, the columr~s in should be carried through at each beam-to-column connection. (d) Integrity. Any beam which carries a column should be checked, together with the members which support it, for localization of damage as recommended in 2.4.5.4. (e) Floor units. Where precast concrete or other heavy floor or roof units are used they should be effectively anchored in the directton of their span either to each other over a support or directly to their supports as recommended in BS 81 10.
2.4.5.3 Additional requirements for certain multi-storey buildings. Local or national regulations may stipulate that tall multi-storey buildings be designed to localize accidental damage.
Steel-framed buildings which satisfy the recommendations of 1.0.1 and 2.4.5.2 may be assumed to meet this requirement provided that the five additional conditions given below are met. ~.
-
A tall multi-storey building which i s required to be designed to localize accidental damage but which does n o t satisfy these five additional conditions should be checked as recommended in 2.4.5.4. (a) Sway resistance. The means of providing sway resistance as recommended in 2.4.2.3 (i.e. steel bracing, rigid joints, shear walls, staircase and l i f t cores, etc.) should be sufficiently distributed throughout the building so that no substantial portion of the structural frame i s solely reliant on a single plane of bracing in each orthogonal direction.. (b) Tying. The ties referred to in 2.4.5.2 should be arranged in continuous lines wherever practicable throughout each floor and roof level in two directions approximately at right angles. These and their connections should be checked for the following factored tensile loads, which need not be considered as additive to other loads. (1) Generally. 0.5wfs,La for any internal ties and 0.25wtstL, for edge ties but not less than 75 kN for floors or 40 k N at roof level where W , i s the total factored dead and imposed load per unit area of floor or roof;
2.4.5.4 Localization of damage. Where required by 2.4.5.3 a building should be checked to see whether at each storey in turn any single column, or beam carrying a column, could be removed without causing collapse of more than a limited portion of the building local to the member concerned. Where the removal of one of these members that would cause failure in excess of appropriate l i m ~ t s member should be designed as a key element as recommended in 2.4.5.5.
For the purposes of this provision, i t may be assumed that substantial permanent deformation of members and their connections is acceptable. load and In this check only one-third of the ordinary w ~ n d one-third of the ordinary imposed load need be considered together with the dead load. except that in the case of buildings used predominantly for storage. or where the imposed load i s of a permanent nature, the full imposed load should be used. The yt factor should be taken as 1.05 except that when considering overturning the dead load supplying the restoring moment should be mult~plled a by yt factor oSb.9.
2.4.5.5 Key elements. Where ~t i s required by 2.4.5.4 to design a member as a key element, the accidental loading should not be less than that stipulated.
Accidental loads should be applied to members from appropriate directions together with the reactions from other building components attached to the member which are subject to the same loading but limited to the ult~mate strength of these components or their connections. In this check the effects of ordinary loads should also be considered, to the same extent and with the same 7 1 factors as recommended in 2.4.5.4 for localization of damage. Any other steel member or other structuial component lateral restraint vital to the stablllty of a key which prov~des element should itself also be designed a s a key element for the same accidental loading.
s, is the mean transverse spacing of the tles; La 1s the greatest distance, in the direction of the tie, between adjacent lines of columns or other vertical supports.
Table 5 . Deflection limits other than for pitched roof portal frames (a) Deflection on beams due to unfactored imposed load Cantilevers Beams carrying plaster or other brittle finish All other beams Purlins and sheeting rails Lengthf180
2 5 Serviceability limit states

2.5.1 Deflection
The deflection under serviceability loads of a building or part should not impair the strength or efficiency of the structure or its components or cause damage to the finishings. When checking for deflections the most adverse realistic combination and arrangement of serviceability loads should be assumed, and the structure may be assumed to be elastic. Table 5 gives recommended limitations for certain structural members. Circumstances may arise where greater or lesser values would be more appropriate. Other members may also need a deflection limitation to be established, e.g. sway bracing. Generally the serviceability loads may be taken as the unfactored imposed loads. When considering dead load plus imposed load plus wind load only 80 % of the imposed load and wind load need be considered. In the case of crane surge and wind, only the greater effect of either need be considered in any load combination.
Span1360 Span1200 See 4.12.2
(b) Horizontal deflection of columns other than portal frames due to unfactored imposed and wind loads Tops of columns in single-storey buildings In each storey of a building with more than one storey (c) Crane gantry girders Vertical deflection due to static wheel loads Horizontal deflection (calculated on the top flange properties alone) due to crane surge
Height1300 Height of storey under consideration1300
2.5.2 Durability
In order to ensure the durability of the structure under conditions relevant to both its intended use and intended life the following factors should be considered at the design stage: (a) the environment; (b) the degree of exposure; (c) the shape of the members and the structural detailing;
Span1600
Span1500
(d) the protective measures if any; (e) whether maintenance i s possible. Reference should be made to BS 5493 in determining adequate methods of protection where applicable. Weather resistant steel may also be used.
NOTE 1. O n low-pitched and flat roofs the possibility of ponding

needs consideration. N O T E 2. For limiting deflections in runway beams refer to
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section three
Section three. Properties of materials and section properties

3.1 General
3.1.1 Strength of steel This standard covers the design of structures fabricated from weldable structural steels in designated design grades supplied to the appropriate product grade a given in s BS 5950 : Part 2. Other steels, excluding rimming steels. may also be used provided that due allowance be made for variations in properties, including ductility and weldability (see BS 5950 : Part 2). The design strength. p , , ( n a y hb taker) as 1 0 Y, but nor t greater than 0 84U, where Y , and 0, r e the rn~nlmum a y~eld strength and the rnlnlmum ult~lndte tans~le srrenqtli respectively as spec~fted the appropriate product In standard (see BS 5950 : Part 2). For the more common types of steel p , may be obta~nt!J from table 6. For rolled sectlons the th~ckness should be taken as the specifled flange thickness from 8s 4.
r
3.2 Welds and fasteners

3.2.1 Welding consurnables
All welding consumables (i.e. electrode wires, filler rods, flux, shielding gas, etc.) should comply with BS 5135.
3.2.2 Ordinary bolts, nuts and washers

Bolts and nuts should comply with BS 4190 or BS 3692. Bolts and nuts of material complying with BS 3692 made to the size and tolerances of BS 4190 are permitted. Countersunk or cup headed bolts should comply with BS 4933. High strength friction grip bolts complying with BS 4395 may be used untorqued. Nuts should be of a strength grade equal to or higher than the grade of bolt. Washers should comply with BS 4320.
3 2 3 Friction grip fasteners ..

I
High strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and washers should comply with BS 4395. Other types of friction grip fasteners may be used provided they have mechanical properties not inferior to bolts complying with BS 4395 and provided they can be reliably tightened t o the minimum shank tensions specified in BS 4604.
Table 6. Design strengths, py

Design grade
Thickness, leor than or equal t o
Sections, plater and hollow sections
mm
3.3 Section properties

3 3 1 Gross section ..
Gross section properties should be determined using the specified size and profile of the member or elements. but allowance should be made for openings larger than required for fasteners. Battens or splices should not be included.
3.3.2 Net area

The net area of a section or element of a section should be taken as its gross area less deductions for fastener holes as given in 3 4 ..
3.3.3 ~ f f & v e area at connections

Additional properties of steel are required for use in plastlc design and reference should be made to 5.3.3. 3.1.2 Other properties of steel The following values for the elastic properties should be used: E = 205 k ~ ! m m ' Modulus of elasticity Po~sson's ratlo Coefflclent of llnear thermal expansion The effeqive area. A of each element of a member at a , connection, where fastener holes occur may be taken as K, times its net area, but not more than its gross area, where: K e = 1.2 for design grade 40 or 43 K e = 1 .I for design grade 50 or W R 50 K, = 1.O for design grade 55 for other steels, K, = 0 75--IY* but G 1.2 where 3.1.3 Steel castlngs and forg~ngs
U
u =030
= 12 K 1 0 . ~ e r O ~ p
U, IS the speclfled mtnlmum ult~mate tens~le strength,

Y , 1 the spec~f~ed s mlnlmum yleld strength
1Q72
Steel casttngs and forqlngs may be used for components In bear~rlgs, lunctlons and other s ~ m ~ l parts. Casttngs should ar comply w ~ t h 3100 and forg~ngs BS with BS 29 Design strengths corresponding t o h o t rolled steel of des~gn grade_ 43 may be adopted where no other information is available.
-
15
3.4 Deductions for holes

3.4.1 Hole area
In deducting for holes for fasteners (including countersunk holes), the gross area of the hole in the plane of its axis and not that of the fastener should be deducted.
3.5 Limiting proportions of cross sections

3.5.1 General
Local buckling can be avoided by limiting the width t o thickness ratios of each element of a cross section subject to compression due to moment or axial load. Elements and cross sections are classified as plastic, compact, seniicompact or slender. Cross sections may be composed of elements of different classes.
3.4.2 Holes not staggered

The area to be deducted should be the maximum sum of the sectional areas of the holes in any cross sections at right angles to the direction of stress in the member.
3.5.2 Classification of cross sections

Class 1. Plastic cross sections are those In which all elements subject to compressiori comply with the values given in table 7 for plastic elements.A plast~c hinge can be developed with sufficient rotation capacity to allow redistribution of moments within the structure.
Only class 1 sections may be used for plastic design.
3.4.3 Staggered holes

When holes are staggered the area to be deducted should be the greater o f : (a) the deduction for non-staggeredholes (see 3.4.2);
(b) the sum of the sectional areas of all holes in any zig-zag line extending progressively across the member or part of the member, less sp2t / 4 g for each gauge space in the chain of holes where
s, is the staggered pitch, i.e. the distance, measured parallel t o the direction of stress in the member, centre-to-centreof holes in consecutive lines, see figure 1;
Class 2. Compact cross sections are those in which all elements subject to compression comply with the values given in table 7 for compact elements. The full plastic moment capacity can be developed but local buckling may prevent development of a plastic hinge with sufficient rotation capacity to permit plastic design.
Class 2 sections can be used without restriction except for plastic design.
is the thickness of the holed material;
g i s the gauge, i.e. the distance, measured at right angles to the direction of stress in the member, centre-to-centre of holes i n consecutive lines, see figure 1.
Class 3. Semi-compact sections are those in which all elements subject to compression comply with the values given in table 7 for semi-compact elements. The stress at the extreme fibres can reach the design strength but local buckling may prevent the development of the full plastic moment.
Class 3 sections are subject to limitations on their ca'pacity which are given in section four.
For sections such as angles with holes in both legs the gauge should be taken as the sum of the back marks to each hole, less the leg thickness. See figure 2.
,
qt
+I
1I
--+-i
I
i r e c 6
of stress
x l' L
,, ,
7
I
+.
1
i
7 + -4- ----I
h-7
, /
I
x
I i
I
*% .
4
1
m m
i
/
I cr'"--i
ir-
- ' n j r /.a
B . C ~ mar*
-
4
I
Figure 1. Staggered holes
Figure 2. Angles with holes in both legs
Table 7. Limiting width to thickness ratios

(Elements which exceed these limits are t o be taken as class 4, slender cross sections.)
I
Type o f element
Type of section
Class of section
(1) Plastic
( 2 )Compact
(3)Sami-compact
Outstand element of compression flange
Built-up by welding
- Q 7.56 T
- Q8.56
b -Q9.56
b T
- Q 136
b -<I56
b T
Rolled sections Internal element of compression flange
- Q 8.56
T
Builtup by welding
- Q 236
T
- Q 266 T
d -Q
t
b -<25e
- d286
b - Q 396 T
b T
Rolled sections Web, with neutral axis at mid-depth
b -< T
326
All sections
796
d -Q986
t
d -<I206
t
Web, generally
AII sections
- t
796 -Q-986 cr 0.4+0.6a t

d
see 3.5.4
Web, where whole section is subject to compression
Built-up by welding
d
t
- < 286 - Q 396

- < 8.56 T and - Q 8.56
- d 286 - Q 396
t
d
t
- Q 286
Rolled sections Legs of single angle and double angle members with components separated Rolled angle sections
d
t
d - Q 396
t
b -Q9.56
T and d - =G9.56
T
T
b d -and-Q15~ T T and b+d - 236 Q T b
Outstand legs of double angle members with angles in contact back-to-back Stems of T-sections
Rolled angle sections
- G 8.56
T 4
-d9.5e
-<I56
T
T-section
% 8.56 t
0
d -<9.56
t
d -GI96
t
Circular tube subject to moment or axial compression
CHS or b u i l t u p by welding
- < 406' t
- < 57e2
t
--D Q 806' t
3. NOTE 1. D ~ m e n s ~ o b,s D, d, T, t a r e as defined ~nf ~ g u r e n

, . 2 vc J:
d
>2
the
where y c Ir the d~stance from the plastic neutral axis t o the edge of the web connected to the compression flange. B u t i f a section should be taken as having compression throughout.
NOTE 2. Check webs for shear buckling i n accordance w i t h 4.4 when d:t
> 63 E.
Class 4. Slender sections are those which contain slender elements subject to compression due to moment or axial load. Local buckling may prevent the stress in a slender section from reaching the design strength. Design of class 4 sections i s considered in 3.6.
3.5.6 Longitudinally stiffened flanges

The unsupported width, b , of a flange or part of a flange, which i s effectively supported along both edges either by a web or a longitudinal stiffener, should be taken as the width between adjacent lines of welds or fasteners connecting i t to the supporting elements. In rolled sections b should be measured as shown in figure 3.
Where the free edge of the flange is supported by a longitudinal stiffener, the flange thickness, T, should not be less than b/20 unless the edge st~ffener itself supported at is suitable intervals. Where the flange is stiffened by transverse a well as s longitudinal stiffeners or a web, the thickness, T, should not be less than 1/100 of the smaller panel dimension a or b, where a is a spacing of transverse stiffeners on the flange.
3.5.3 Classification of elements

Flat elements in a cross section are either: (a) internal elements attached on both longitudinal edges to other elements or to longitudinal stiffeners which are connected at suitable intervals to transverse stiffeners, or
( b ) outstand elements attached on only one horizontal edge to an adjacent element, the other edge being free. Flat elements are generally of constant thickness. Tapered elements may be treated as flat elements havjng the average thickness defined in BS 4. Elements may be classified as plastic, compact or semicompact if they meet the limits given in table 7. Those which do not meet the limits for semi-compact elements are classified as slender.
3.6 Slender cross sections

3.6.1 General
Local buckling may become the design criterion when the proportions of elements in a cross section exceed those given for semi-compact elements in table 7. Such cross sections are defined as slender and their capacity i s limited.
3.5.4 Webs o f semi-compact sections

The limiting width to thickness ratio, dlt, for the web of a semi-compact section i s given by the following: (a) when R is positive (1) for sections built-up by welding
3.6.2 Sections with thin webs required t o carry shear

Where thin webs which have a d l t ratio 636 are required to carry shear the capacity of the cross section should be calculated from 4.4.4.2.
>
(2) for rolled sections
d -Q
t
1206
1+1.5R
and
<
(G
3.6.3 Webs subject t o moments and axial loads and

circular hollow sections
6
- 2)
(b) when R i s negative
1206 and Q 2506 (l+Rl2 in which R is the ratio of the mean longitudinal stress in the web top,, compression being taken as positive and tension as negative.
d
7'
In the absence of a more rigorous method of analysis a value , of the design strength, p , should be assumed such that the limiting proportions for semi-compact sections are met (see table 7).The same reduced value of p , should be used for that element throughout the design of the section whenever i t i s in compression, except that such reduction need not be made in the design of connections to that element.
3.5.5 Compound flanges

The following width to thickness ratios should be considered: (a) the outstand of the compound flange compared to the thickness of the original flange; (b) the internal width of each added plate between the lines of welds or fasteners which connect i t to the original flange, compared to its own thickness; (c) any outstand of an added plate beyond the lines of welds or fasteners which connect i t to the original flange, compared to its own thickness.
3.6.4 Other elements.

Where a slender element is in compression the design strength, p y , shouldbe reduced by the factor given in table 8. The same reduced value of p should be used for , that element throughout the design of the section whenever i t is in compression except that such reduction need not be made in the design of connections to that element.
Table 8. Strength reduction factors f o r slender elements

Type of element
Type of section
Strength
reduction factor
Outstand element of compression flange
Built u p by welding
10 -
b -- 3 TE
11 b - 4 TE
-
Rolled sections
Internal element of compression flange
Build u p by welding
21
7 -TE
7
31
Rolled sections
b -- 8 T
The lesser of 11
Legs o f single angle and double angle members w i t h components separated
Rolled angle section
d -TE
and 19
(b+d) -4 T
Outstand legs o f double angle members with angles i n contact back-to-back Stems of T-sections
11 angle b - 4 T 14 d -- 5 tE
N O T E 1 . D~rnensions d, t, Tare as defined in figure 3. b, N O T E 2. r

=
(:51 v)
N O T E 3. The strength of slender cross sections may be obtained from 3.6.2, 3.6.3 and 3.6.4 as appropriate. Alternatively the more rigorous approach given in BS 5950 : Part 5 may be used.
BS 5 9 5 0 : Part 1 : 1 9 9 0 Section three
Rolled beams and columns
L-4
Rolled channels
RHS
b =6
-
3t
d=O-3t
I
Tees Angles
CHS
Double angles
---
Fabricated sections
Built-up sections (see 3.5.5)

Figure 3. Dimensions of sections
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section four
Section four. Design of structural elements
4.1 General
4.1.1 Scope
This section gives rules for the design of simple elements or elements comprising parts of frames.
along the flange, provided that the dead load of the floor and the imposed load it supports together constitute the dominant loading on the beam. The floor construction should be capable of resisting this lateral force.
4.2.3 Shear
Shear force F , not greater than shear capacity P,, where Pv = 0.6p,Av and A, i s the shear area taken as follows: (a) rolled I. H and channel sections, load parallel to web (b) built-up sections and boxes, load parallel to webs
(c) solid bars and plates
4.1.2 Class of cross section

Reference should be made to 3.5 for the classification of cross sections.
tD
4.1.3 Design strength

The design strength should be obtained from table 6. The reduction of 2 0 ~ l m m 'given in 4.7.5 for welded elements in compression does not apply t o the element when it i s checked for other effects such as bending, shear and connections.
0.9A
(d) rectangular hollow sections, load parallel to webs (e) circular hollow sections
4.2 Members in bending

4.2.1 General 4.2.1.1 Span o f beams. The span of a beam should be
taken between the effective points of support.
( f ) any other case where

t
is the total web thickness;
B is the breadth;
D i s the overall depth;

d
4.2.1.2 Length of cantilevers. The length of a cantilever

should be taken as the distance from the effective point of the support to the tip of the cantilever.
i s the depth of the web;
i s the area of the section;
4.2.1.3 Generalconditions. All members in bending should

meet the following conditions. (a) A t critical points the combination of maximum moment and co-existent shear, and the combination of maximum shear and co-existent moment should be checked. (b) The deflection limits given in 2.5.1 should be considered. (c) Unless the compression flange has full lateral restraint, as indicated i n 4.2.2, the resistance of the member to lateral torsional buckling should be checked in accordance with 4.3. ( d l Local buckling should be considered as given in 3.6. (e) When loads or reactions are applied through the flange to the web the conditions of 4.5 for bearing and buckling should be met.
A, is the area of the rectilinear element of the section which has the largest dimension in the direction parallel to the load.
When the depth to thickness ratio, dlt, of a web exceeds
636 then it should be checked for shear buckling in

accordance with 4.4.5.
4.2.4 Elastic shear stress

In sections where webs vary in thickness or have holes significantly larger than those required for fasteners, the shear stress should be calculated from first principles assuming elastic behaviour. In such cases the maximum shear stress, f,, should not exceed 0 . 7 ~ ~ .
4.2.5 M-nt
capacity with low shear load
0.6Pv the moment capacity, M, should be , Where F, taken ahfollows.

For pbstic or compact sections:
-.
4.2.2 Full lateral restraint

When full lateral restraint i s provided no reference need be made to 4.3 which deals with the lateral torsional buckling resistance of the member. Full restraint exists i f the frictional or positive connection of a floor or other construction to the compression flange of the member is capable of resisting a lateral force of not less than 2.5 % o f the maximum factored force in the compression flange of the member, under factored loading. This load should be considered as distributed uniformly
M, = p v S but < 1 . 2 p v Z
NOTE. The elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working load. I f S > 1.22 then the 1.2 constant may be replaced bv the ratio of the factored load to the unfactored load.
For semi-compact sections:
M, = P,Z For slender sections: M, = p V Z where
p , is the design strength (reduced for slender sections, see 3.6);
S is the plastic modulus of the section about the relevant axis;

Z is the elastic modulus of the section about the relevant axis. When the depth to thickness ratio, d l t , of a web exceeds 63e then it should be checked for shear buckling in accordance with 4.4.5.
When a beam requires lateral restraint within its span, such restraint should have sufficient strength and stiffness to inhibit lateral movement of the compression flange relative to the supports. This may be provided by lateral restraints or torsional restraints (see 4.3.2 and 4.3.3). All beams should also satisfy the requirements of 4.2.1 and 4.2.3 to 4.2.6 inclusive.
4.2.6 Moment capacity with high shear load

Where Fv 0.6Pv the moment capacity, M c ,should be taken a s follows. (a) For plastic or compact sections:
4.3.2 Lateral restraints 4.3.2.1 Where one or more lateral restraints are required
at intervals within the span of a beam, these intermediate lateral restraints should be capable of resisting a total force of not less than 2.5 % of the maximum factored force in the compression flange, divided between the intermediate lateral restraints in proportion to their spacing. The intermediate lateral restraints should either be connected to an appropriate system of bracing capable of transferring the restraint forces to the beam's effective points of support, or else connected to an independent robust part of the structure capable of fulfilling a similar function. Where two or more parallel members require lateral restraint at intervals, i t is not adequate merely to connect the members together such that they become mutually dependent.
>
Mc = p y ( S- S v p l ) but
where p , =
< 1.2pvZ
pv
2.5Fv
1.5
and Sv is taken as follows: For sectiohs with equal flanges: the plastic modulus of the shear area,A, (see figure 4(a)); For sections with unequal flanges: the plastic modulus of the gross section less the plastic modulus of that part of the section remaining after deduction of the shear area (see figure 4(b)). (b) For semi-compact sections:
M =pvZ c (c) For slender sections: M = pvZ c

where py and Z are as defined in 4.2.5. When the depth to thickness ratio, d l t , of a web exceeds 636 then it should be checked for shear buckling in accordance with 4.4.5.
4.3.2.2 Where three or more intermediate lateral restraints

are provided, each intermediate lateral restraint should be capable of resisting a force of not less than 1 % of the maximum factored force in the compression flange. in this case, the bracing system should be capable of resisting the greater of the effects of: (a) the 1 % restraint force considered a acting at only s one point at a time; (b) the restraint forces described in 4.3.2.1. 4.3.2.3 Where more than three parallel members share the same system of restraints, the combined lateral restraint force should be taken a the sum of the three largest lateral s restraint forces required for each individual restrained member, a determined in accordance with 4.3.2.1 and s
4.3 Lateral torsional buckling

4.3.1 General
A beam not provided with full lateral restraint a defined in s 4.2.2 should be checked for resistance to lateral torsional buckling.
4.3.2.2.
Shear area = A, = Rolled section
to
(al Equal flanges
Shear area = A, = rd Welded section
Shear area = A, = td Welded section
(bl Unequal flanges
Figure 4. Effective shear area of typical sections
4.3.2.4 Purlins adequately restrained by sheeting need not

normally be checked for the forces arising from the restraining of rafters of roof trusses or portal frames carrying predominantly roof loads, provided that either: (a) there is bracing of adequate stiffness in the plane of the rafters; or (b) the roof sheeting is capable of acting a a diaphragm. s
(a) For beams with lateral restraints at the ends only, the value of L E should be obtained from table 9, taking L as the span of the beam. I f the conditions of restraint at each end differ, the mean value of L E should be taken. (b) For beams with effective lateral restraints at intervals within their length, the value of LE should be taken a s 1 .OL for normal loading conditions or 1.2L for destabilizing loading conditions (see 4.3.4). taking L a the s distance between restraints. (c) For a portion of a beam between one end and the first intermediate restraint, account should be taken of the conditions of restraint at the support. The effective length LE should be taken a the mean of the value given s in item (b) and the value given by table 9 for the conditions of restraint at the support, taking L a the distance s between the restraint and the support in both cases.
4.3.3 Torsional restraints

A beam may be taken a torsionally restrained (about its s longitudinal axis) at any point in its length where both the flanges are effectively held in position relative to each other by external means, (in the lateral direction). Torsional restraint at support positions may be provided by bearing stiffeners acting in conjunction with the bearing of the beam (see 4.5.8). Torsional restraint may be provided at any point b y means of a suitable diaphragm between two similar members or else an equivalent panel of bracing. Alternatively such restraint may be provided by external means. A torsional restraint should be capable of resisting a couple comprising forces of not less than 1 % of the maximum factored force in the compression flange, acting at a lever arm equal to thedepth between the centroidsof the flanges.
4.3.6 Effective lengths of cantilevers 4.3.6.1 With intermediate lateral restraint. If a cantilever
has intermediate restraints to the compression flange, or when a moment is applied at the tip, the lengths between restraints should be treated as beams; the effective length, L E , should be taken from 4.3.5.
4.3.6.2 Without intermediate lateral restraint. When a

cantilever has no intermediate restraint to the compression flange and no moment IS applied to the tip, the effective length, L E V should be taken from table 10.
4.3.4 Destabilizing toad
Destabilizing load conditions exist when a load is applied to the top flange of a beam and both the load and the flange are free to deflect laterally (and possibly rotationally also) relative to the centroid of the beam.
4.3.7 Lateral torsional buckling resistance of members

subject to bending
4.3.5 Effective lengths of beams

When considering lateral torsional buckling, the effective length, L E ,of a beam should be taken as follows.
4.3.7.1 General. Equal flanged rolled sections may be checked using the conservative approach in 4.3.7.7.
For other members, or a portion of a member, between
(
I I
Table 9. Effective length L E for beams

Conditions of restraint at supports
I
I I
Both flanges fully restrahed against rotation on plan Both flanges partially restrained against rotation on plan Both flanges free to rotate on plan
Loading conditions Normal
] Destabilizing
0.85L
I I
Compression flange laterally restrained Beam fully restrained against torsion
0.7 L
0.85L
I
1.2L
I
1.2L + 2 0
1.4L + 2 0
1 .OL
Compression flange laterally unrestrained Both flanges free to rotate on plan
Restraint against torsion provided only by positive connection of bottom flange to supports Restraint against torsion provided only b y dead bearing of bottom flange on supports
1.OL + 2 0
1.2L + 2 0
D is the depth of the beam.
1.
adjacent lateral restraints, subject to bending about their major axis the following condition should be satisfied:
4.3.7.2 Equivalent_uniform moment, uniform moment, M , i s given by:
i. equivalent The
M < Mb
where
M = mM,
where
i s the equivalent uniform moment;
Mb is the lateral torsional buckling resistance moment.

NOTE. For box sectlons of u n i f o r m th4ckness (includ~ng structural
MA is the maximum moment on the member or the portion of the member under consideration;
m i s an equivalent uniform moment factor, determined from 4.3.7.6.
hollow sect~ons) h ~ s t check is unnecessary within the l~rnits given in 8.2.6.1 and M b may be taKen aspyS,. For circular hollow sections a lateral torsional buckling check is not required.
Table 10. Effective length, L E V cantilever of length L for

Restraint conditions A t support A t tip Loading conditions Normal Destabilizing
Continuous with lateral restraint only
Free Laterally restrained on top flange only Torsionally restrained only Laterally and torsionally restrained
3.0 L
2.7 L
7.5 L 7.5 L 4.5 L
2.4 L 2.1 L
3.6 L
Continuous with lateral and torsional restraint
Free Laterally restrained on top flange only Torsionallyrestrainedonly Laterally and torsionally restrained
1.OL 0.9 L 0.8L
2.5 L 2.5 L 1.5 L 1.2L
0.7 L
Built-in laterally and torsionally
Free Lateral restraint on top flange only Torsionally restrained anly
0.8 L
0.7 L
1.4 L 1.4L 0.6 L
,j
0.6 L 0.5 L
Laterally and torsionally restrainef
0.5 L
/+-;,
Braced laterally in at least one
Top flange restraint
Torsional restraint
Lateral and torsion restraint
NOTE. When values from thls table are used for L E the equivalent u n ~ f o r r n moment factor, r n , and the slenderness correction factor.
n , should be taken as 1 0.
4.3.7.3 Buckling resistance, M b . For members with at least one axis of symmetry the buckling resistance moment, M b ,
is given by: Mb =SXP, where Sx i s the plastic modulus of the section about the major axis;
4.3.7.4 Bending strength, p b . The bending strength,^,,, i s related to the equivalent slenderness, hLT,the design
strength of the materiai,p,, and member type, i.e. rolled or fabricated by welding. p b can be obtained from tables 11, 12 or from the formulae in B.2 on which these tables are based.
pb i s the bending strength determined from 4.3.7.4.
Table 11. Bending strength,^,. (in N/mmZ) for rolled sections
Table 12. Bending strength,^,, (in N/mm2) for welded sections
245
265
275
325
340
355
415 408 390 371 350 329 307 285 263 242 223 204 188 173 159 147 136 126 117 108 101 94 88 83 78 73 69 65 62 59 56 53 50 48 46 43 40 36 33 31 29
430
450
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 210 220
245 245 238 227 217 206 195 185 174 164 154 144 135 126 118 111 104 97 91 86 81 76 72 68 64 61 58 55 52 50 47 45 43 41 39 36 33
265 265 254 242 231 219 207 196 184 172 161 151 141 131 123 115 107 101 94 89 83 78 74 70 66 62 59 56 53 51 48 46 44 42 40 37 34
275 273 262 250 238 226 213 201 188 176 165 154 144 134 125 117 109 102 96 90 84 79 75 71 67 63 60 57 54 51 49 46 44 42 40 37 34
325 316 302 287 272 257 241 225 210 195 181 168 156 144 134 125 116 108 101 95 89 83 78 74 70 66 62 59 56 53 51 48 46 44 42 38 35 32 30 28
340 328 313 298 282 266 249 232 216 200 186 172 159 147 137 127 118 110 103 96 90 84 79 75 70 66 63 60 56 54 51 49 46 44 42 39 35 33 30 28
355 341 325 309 292 274 257 239 222 205 190 175 162 150 139 129 120 111 104 97 91 85 80 75 71 67 63 60 57 54 51 49 47 44 42 39 36 33 30 28
421 402 382 361 338 315 292 269 247 226 208 190 175 161 148 137 127 118 109 102 95 89 84 79 74 70 66 62 59 56 53 50 48 46 44 40 37 34 31 29
438 418 397 374 350 325 300 276 253 231 212 194 178 163 150 139 128 119 111 103 96 90 84 79 75 70 66 63 59 56 53 51 48 46 44 40 37 34 31 29
4.3.7.5 Determination of h L T . For flanged members symmetrical about at least one axis and uniform through its length: XLT = nuvh
For members of other cross section, or of non-uniform section, refer to 8.2.6, 8.2.7 and 8.3. In the above equation:
N=
where
lcf I c f + ltf
I,,, I* are the second moments of area of the compression and tension flanges respectively about the minor axis of the section;
A is defined above;
x is the torsional index and may be determined from 8.2.5 or published tables. Alternatively, x may be taken as DlT, provided that u i s taken a 0.9 for rolled sections, or 1.0 for other s sections.
NOTE. N = 0.5 for members w ~ t h equal flanges
h is the minor axis slenderness: = L E / f ywhere

LE is the effective length from 4.3.5 to 4.3.6;
r, i s the radius of gyration about the minor axis of the member.
u i s a buckling parameter: H, (a) for a ROLLED I, or channel section, u may be taken from appendix 6, published tables or conservatively as 0.9; (b) for any other section, u may be taken from appendix 8 or conservatively as 1.O.
(2) For other sections v may be determined from 8.2.5 using the formulae on which table 1 4 is based.
n i s a slenderness correction factor: determined from
4.3.7.6. 4.3.7.6 Factors m and n. Factors m and n should oe determined from the following.
(a) Members of uniform cross section, see table 1 3 . (b) Members of nonuniform cross section, reference should be made to 8.3.
v i s a slenderness factor:
(1) for flanged members symmetric about one axis of uniform section v may be determined from table 1 4 using N and X/x in which:
Table 13. Use o f m and n factors for members of uniform section

Description Memben not subject to destabilizing loads (see 4.3.41 Memben subject to destabilizing loads (see 4.3.41
m Members loaded between adjacent lateral restraints Sections with equal flanges Sections with unequal flanges Members not loaded between adjacent lateral restraints Sections with equal flanges Sections with unequal flanges Cantilevers without intermediate lateral restraints
n
From tables 15 and 16
1 .O
1.0
1 .O
1 .O
1.O
1 .O
1 .O
From table
p1.0
1.O
1 .O
18
1 .O 1.0 1 .O 1 .O
1 .O
1 .O
1 .O
1 .O
Table 14. Slenderness factor v for flanged beams of uniform section
T
1. O 0.9 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0 0.79 0.78 0.77 0.76 0.75 0.74 0.72 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.66 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.61 0.60 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.56 0.54 0.53 0.51 0.50 0.49 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.81 0.80 0.80 0.78 0.77 0.76 0.74 0.73 0.71 0.70 0.68 0.67 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.60 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.55 0.54 0.52 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.44
compression Tension
T I[
0.6 0.5 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.88 0.86 0.84 0.82 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.54 0.52 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.46 1.00 0.99 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.84 0.82 0.79 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.67 0.65 0.64 0.61 0.59 0.57 0.55 0.53 0.52 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.47
Compression Tension
0.8
0.7
0.4
0.3
02
0.1
0 .O
0.84 0.83 0.82 0.81 0.80 0.78 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.70 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.65 0.63 0.62 0.61 0.60 0.59 0.57 0.55 0.53 0.52 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.46 0.45
0.88 0.87 0.86 0.85 0.83 0.82 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.75 0.73 0.71 0.70 0.68 0.67 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.61 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.54 0.53 0.51 0.50 0.49 0.47 0.46 0.45
1.11 1.10 1.08 1.06 1.03 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.88 085 0.82 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.67 0.64 0.61 0.59 0.57 0.55 0.53 0.52 0.50 0.49 0.48 r , v
128 1.27 1.24 120 1.16 1.12 1.07 1.03 0.99 0.95 0.92 0.89 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.67 0.64 0.61 0.59 0.57 0.55 0.53 0.52 0.50 0.49
1.57 1.53 1.48 1.42 1.35 129 122 1.16 1.11 1.05 1.01 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.70 0.66 0.64 0.61 0.59 0.57 0.55 063 0.52 0.50
2.20 2.11 1.98 1.84 1.70 1.57 1.46 1.36 1.27 1.20 1.13 1.07 1.02 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.78 0.73 0.70 0.66 0.63 0.61 0.59 0.57 0.55 0.53 0.51
12.67 6.36 4.27 32 4 2.62 2.21 1.93 1.71 1.55 1.41 1.31 1.22 1 .14 1 .08 1.02 0.98 0.93 09 0 0.86 0.83 0.78 0.73 0.69 0.66 0.63 0.61 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.53
NOTE. 1 For beams with EQUAL flanges, N = 0.5. For beams with U N E Q U A L flinger refer to 4.3.7.5. NOTE 2. v should be determ~ned from the general formulae given in 8.2.5, on qhich t h ~ s table is based:
(a) for sections with LIPPED flanges (e.g. gantry g~rders composed of chan& (b) for intermediate values to the right of the stepped line in the table.
+ universal beam); and
Table 15. Slenderness correction factor, n , for members with applied loading substantially concentrated within the middle fifth of the unrestrained length
M &, E ,
----.
- ----- - -.
k k
NOTE maXlmUm
1. All hogg~ng moments are +ve.
NOTE 2. 0 i s defined ~n table 18. NOTE 3. Mo IS the m~d.lengthmoment on a strnply supported span equal to the unrestra~ned length (see table 17).
---flM
Unrestra~ned length L - -
1
0.6 0.92 0.94 0.97 0.95 0.94 0.92 0.90 . 0.86 0.85 0.83 0.82 0.81 0.79 0.72 0.61 0.54 0.54 0.54 0.57 0.60 0.63 0.64 0.64 0.65 0.66 0.68 0.69 0.70 0.83 0.90 0.91 0.4 0.87 0.90 0.93 0.95 0.94 0.92 0.89 0.86 0.85 0.84 0.83 0.81 0.80 0.77 0.67 0.59 0.53 0.52 0.54 0.55 0.57 0.58 0.59 0.60 0.61 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.77 0.86 0.86 02 0.82 0.85 0.89 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.89 0.86 0.85 0.84 0.83 0.82 0.82 0.80 0.73 0.65 0.57 0.54 0.54 0.54 0.55 0.56 0.56 0.57 0.58 0.59 0.60 0.61 0.72 0.79 0.82
0 positive
"I=MIM,
0 negative
0.8 0.96 0.99 0.98 0.95 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.85 0.83 0.82 0.80 0.78 0.66 0.56 0.53 0.57 0.58 0.62 0.66 0.69 0.70 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.77 0.79 0.81 0.89 0.95 0.96 0O . 0.77 0.80 0.84 0.94 0.93 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.82 0.79 0.71 0.64 0.59 0.57 0.55 0.54 0.54 0.54 0.55 0.56 05 6 0.57 0.58 0.67 0.74 0.77 -0.2 0.72 0.75 0.79 0.89 0.92 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.84 0.85 0.84 0.83 0.77 0.71 0.66 0.63 0.60 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.56 0.56 0.56 0.64 0.70 0.72 4.4 0.67 0.69 0.73 0.84 0.90 0.91 0.89 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.83 0.77 0.72 0.68 0.65 0.61 '4.60 0.59 0.58 0 58 0.57 0.57 0.56 0 61 067 0.68 4.6 0.66 0.68 0.71 0.79 0.85 0.91 0.88 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.86 0.86 0.87 0.89 0.84 0.80 0.76 0.73 0.69 0.66 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.61 0.60 0.60 0.64 0.65 -0.8 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.77 0.80 0.92 0.88 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.87 0.87 0.88 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.83 0.80 0.77 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.70 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.62 0.63 0.65
--1 .O
1O . +50.00 +10.00 +5.00 +2.W +1.50 +1.00 +0.50 0.00 -0.10 -0.20 -0.30 -0.40 -0.50 -0.60 -0.70 -0.80 -0.90 -1.00 -1.10 -1.20 -1.30 -1.40 -1.50 -1.60 -1.70 -1.80 -1.90 -2.00 -5.00 -50.00
Infinity NOTE
1.00 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.86 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.77 0.62 0.56 0.56 0.59 0.62 0.66 0.70 0.73 0.74 0.75 0.76 0.77 0.79 0.80 0.81 0.93 0.99 1.OO
0.65 0.67 0.70 0.76 0.80 0.92 0.88 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.87 0.87 0.88 0.88 089 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.89 0.87 0.83 0.81 0.80 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.75 0.74 0.65 0.65 0.65
'
,
NOTE
4. The values o f n i n this table apply only to members of U N I F O R M sectton. 5. Values for intermediate values o f 0 and 7 may be interpolated. N O T E 6. When n f r o m this table is used, rn = 1.00.
N O T E 1. A l l hoygtng moments are +ve. NOTE
2.0 i s defined i n table 18.
ffM
N O T E 3. Mo IS the mtd-length m o m e n t o n a simply supported span equal t o t h e unrestrained length (see table 17)
lnftnlty
100
0.96
091
10 86
0.82
0.77
0.72
0.68
0.65
0.65
0.65
N O T E 4 The values o f n In t h ~ s table apply o n l y t o members o f UNIFORM sectton. N O T E 5. Values f o r tntermedlare values of fi a n d y m a y be tnterpolated N O T E 6. When n f r o m this table
IS
used, rnL 1.00.
Table 17. Moment diagram between adjacent points of lateral restraint
~ h " ~
p+ve y+ve y-ve y - ve
+M p + v e D .
M p+ve M +
"] ? S /' M
0-ve r+ve
W
0-ve y-ve y-ve
nM
M%nM- v e 0
Table 18. Equivalent uniform moment factor, m
P
Beta positive
M ( -M l)l if
1. O 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 .OO 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80
1-"I -b
B e t a negative
"
0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0. O -0.1 -4.2 4.3 -0.4

4.5 to
0.76 0.72 0.68 0.64 0.60 0.57 0.54 0.51 0.48 0.45
0.43
-1
.o
N O T E 1 The values o f m I n this table apply o n l y t o end moments applled t o beams o f U N I F O R M section w l t h E Q U A L flanges. . I n all other cases, m = 1.0. N O T E 2.Values o f rn f o r intermediate valuer of
0 may be interpolated, or determined f r o m the equation:
m = 0.57 + 0.330 + O.lOP\ b u t n o t less than 0.43. N O T E 3.0 IS the r a t i o f o r t h e smaller end m o m e n t t o t h e larger end m o m e n t o n a span equal t o t h e unrestrained length.
I I
1
When using table 19 the effect of the loads and moments conservative approach. If a full analysis i s required or the between restraints may be considered by multiplying the sections are not equal flanged rolled sections, then the provisions effective length by the slenderness correction factor n. of 4.3.7.1 to 4.3.7.6 should be used. Reference may be made to 4.3.7.6 for the value of n . W e r n . atively, e k p t for destabilizing loads (see 4.3.41. n may be In each length between lateral restraints, the maximum taken frOni table 20. moment should not exceed the buckling resistance moment, Mb, of the section taken aspbSw Where
~ ~
4.3.7.7 Equal flanged rolled sections. This clause gives a
4
I
4.3.8 ~ u c k l i n g resistance moment for single angles
pb is determined from table 19(a), (b), (c) or (dl, for and x;
The buckling resistance moment for a single angle should be taken as:
S ,
A
L,
is the plastic modulus of the section about the x-x axis; is the slenderness of section =
IS
M, = 0.8pvZ for Llr, f 100 M, = 0.7p,Z for Llr, M,

where
LEI'^
< 180 = 0.6pvZ for Llrvv < 300
the effective length from 4.3.5 or 4.3.6,
'rv is the radius of gyration about the member minor axis;

x
Z is the smaller elastic modulus about the appropriate

axis; rvv is the radius of gyration about the weakest ax&; L is the unrestrained length.
is the torsional index (see 4.3.7.5) which may be taken as D I T .
Table 19. Bending strength,^,, (in ~ I r n r n ' ) rolled sections with equal flanges for
(a) p , = 265 ~ / r n r n ~
10 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 210 220 230 240 2 50 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 263 260 257 254 252 249 247 244 242 240 237 235 233 231 229 227 225 223 22 1 219 217 215 213 21 1 209 207 204 200 197 194 190 265 265 265 265 26 1 255 250 245 240 235 230 226 222 217 213 209 206 202 198 195 191 188 185 182 179 176 173 170 167 165 162 160 157 155 153 148 144 140 136 132
15
20 265 265 265 258 249 24 1 233 225 217 210 202 195 188 182 176 170 164 159 154 149 144 140 136 132 129 125 122 119 116 113 110 108 105 103 101 96 93 89 86 83
25 265 265 265 256 247 2 38 229 22 1 212 204 196 188 180 173 166 160 154 148 142 137 132 128 124 120 116 112 109 106 103 100 97 95 92 90 88 84 80 77 74 71
30
35
40 265 265 264 254 244 235 225 215 205 196 187 178 169 160 153 145 138 132 125 120 114 109 105 101 97 93 89 86 83 80
45 265 265 263 254 244 234 224 214 204 195 185 176 167 1 58 150 143 136 129 123 117 111 106 102 97 93 89 86 83 80 77 74 71 69
50 265 265 263 254 244 234 224 214 204 194 184 175 166 157 149 141 134 127 121 115
265 265 265 26 1 253 246 2 39 232 225 219 2 13 207 201 196 190 185 180 176 171 167 163 159 155 152 148 145 142 139 136 133 130 128 125 123 120 116 112 108 104 101
26' 265 264 255 246
265 265 264 254 245 235 226 216 207 198 189 180 171 163 156 148 142 135 129 124 119 114 109 105 101 97 94 91 88 85 82 79 77 75 73 69 65 62 59 57
236 227 218 209 200 191 183 175 167 160 153 147 140 135 129 124 119 115 111 107 103 100 97 94 91 88 86 83 81 79 75 71 68 65 63
109 104 99 95 91
87 83 80 77 74 71 69 66 64 62 58 55 52 49 47
77 75 73 70 68
64 61 58 55 52
67 65
61 58 54 52 49
Table 19 (continued) (b) p , = 275 ~ / r n r n *
10 275 275 275 275 269 263 258 252 247 242 237 233 228 224 219 21 5 21 1 207 204 200 196 193 190 186 183 180 177 174 171 169 166 163 161 158 156 151 147 143 139 135
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50 275 275 272 262 251 241 230 220 209 199 189 179 169 160 152 144 136 129 123 116 111 106 101 96 92 88 84 81 78 75 72 70 67 65 63 59 55 52 50 47
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 100 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 210 220 230 240 250
275 275 275 275 275 275 275 275 274 271 2 68 265 262 260 257 254 252 250 247 245 242 240 2 38 236 233 231 229 227 225 223 22 1 219 217 215 213 209 206 202 199 195
275 275 275 269 261 254 246 2 39 232 225 219 213 207 201 195 190 185 180 175 171 167 162 159 155 151 148 144 141 138 135 133 130 127 125 122 118 114 110 106 103
275 275 275 266 257 248 240 232 223 215 208 200 193 186 180 174 168 162 157 152 147 143 139 135 131 127 124 121 118 115 112 109 107 104 102 98 94 90 87 84
275 275 274 264 255 246 236 227 218 209 20 1 193 185 177 170 163 157 151 145 140 135 130 126 122 118 114 111 107 104 101 99 96 93 91 89 85 81 78 74 72
275 275 273 263 253 244 234 224 215 206 196 188 179 171 164 156 150 143 137 132 126 121 117 113 109 105 101 98 95 92 89 87 84 82 80 76 72 69 66 63
275 275 272 263 253 243 233 223 213 203 193 184 175 167 159 151 144 138 132 126 120 115 111 106 102 99 95 92 89 86 83 80 78 76 74 70 66 63 60 57
275 275 272 262 252 242 232 22 1 21 1 20 1 191 182 173 164 156 148 141 134 128 122 116 111 106 102 98 94 90 87 84 81 78 76 73 71 69 65 62 58 56 53
275 275 272 262 252 241 231 22 1 210 200 190 180 171 162 153 146 138 131 125 119 113 108 103 99 95 91 87 84 81 78 75 72 70 68 65 62 58 55 52 50
Table 19 (continued)
( c ) p , = 340 ~ / r n r n ~
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 210 220 230 240 250
340 340 340 340 340 340 337 333 329 325 32 1 318 214 31 1 307 304 301 297 294 29 1 288 285 282 279 276 273 270 267 265 262 2 59 257 254 251 249 244 239 234 2 30 225
340 340 333 333 322 315 308 30 1 294 287 28 1 275 269 263 257 252 246 241 236 23 1 227 222 218 213 209 205 207 197 194 190 187 184 180 177 174 168 163 158 153 149
340 340 333 32 3 312 303 293 283 274 265 257 248 240 232 225 218 21 1 205 199 193 188 183 178 173 168 164 160 156 153 149 146 142 139 136 134 128 123 119 115 111
340 340 320 318 307 296 285 273 263 252 242 232 223 213 205 197 189 182 176 170 164 158 153 148 144 139 135 132 128 125 121 118 115 113 110 105 101 96 93 89
340 340 328 316 304 292 280 268 256 244 232 222 21 1 201 192 184 176 168 161 155 148 143 138 133 128 124 120 116 112 109 106 103 100 98 95 90 86 82 79 76
340 340 32 7 315 302 290 277 264 25 1 239 227 215 204 194 184 175 166 159 151 145 138 133 127 122 118 113 109 106 102 99 96 93 90 87 85 81 77 73 70 67
340 339 327 314 301 288 275 2 62 248 235 223 21 1 199 188 178 169 160 152 145 138 131 125 120 115 110 106 102 98 95 92 8 8 . 86 83 80,. 78: 74 70 66 63 60
340 339 326 314 30 1 287 274 2 60 246 233 220 207 196 185 174 165 156 147 140 133 126 120 115 110 105 101 97 93 90 86 83 80 78 75 73 69 65 61 58 56
340 339 326 313 300 286 273 259 245 231 218 205 193 182 171 161 152 144 136 129 123 117 111 106 101 97 93 89 86 82 79 77 74 71 69 65 61 58 55 52
340 339 326 313 300 286 272 258 244 230 216 203 191 180 169 159 150 142 134 127 120 114 108 103 99 94 90 86 83 79 76 74 71 68 66 62 58 55 52 49
'
Table 19 (concluded)
(d) p , = 355 ~ / r n r n ~
Table 20. Slenderness correction factor, n, for standard load conditions

Load conditions Bending moment diagram between lateral restraints n
f?
-
j-[f
fmJ h
P"1 '-t +u
or 16.
+
v
h i +
4.4 Plate girders 4.4.1 General
The relevant conditions in 4.2 and 4.3 should be satisfied.
0.77
OaG5
0.94
0.94
0.94
NOTE 1. For other load conditions, n may be obtained from tables 15 NOTE 2. For destabilizing loads (see 4.3.4). n should be taken as 1.0.
4.4.2.2 Minimum web thickness for serviceability. For serviceability:

(a) Without intermediate stiffeners: t (b) With transverse stiffeners only:
>U
rl
250
4.4.2 Dimensions of webs and flanges 4.4.2.1 General. Reference should be made to 3.5 for classification of sections.
The thickness of webs should comply with both 4.4.22 and 4.4.2.3.
( 1 ) where stiffener spacing a
d > d: t > -
250
( 2 ) where stiffener spacing a < d:
>-
(c) With longitudinal stiffeners: a s given in BS 5400.
4.4.2.3 Minimum web thickness to avoid flange buckling.

In order to avoid the flange buckling into the web: (a) Without intermediate stiffeners: t 2 250
4.4.5.2 Design of internal and endpanels. Internal panels

may be designed using tension field action and the end panels designed accordingly. Alternatively internal and end panels may be designed simply (but conservatively) without using tension field action.
(345 ) m
1.2
(b) With intermediate transverse stiffeners:
4.4.5.3 Design without using tension field action.

This clause should be used for the design of unstiffened girders and may be used (conservatively) for the design of . Internal and end panels of a st~ffened girder. The shear buckling resistance, Vc,, of a stiffened or unstiffened panel is given by: Vcr = qcrdt where q,, is the critical shear strength as obtained from tables 21 (a) to (dl as appropriate. For girders without intermediate stiffeners the spacing should be taken as infinity.
( 1 ) where stiffenerspacinga > 1.5d: 2

(2) where stiffener spacing a
< 1.56: f 5 - (*) 250 455

d
where pYf i s the design strength of the compression flange.
4.4.3 Design strength of components

The design strength should be obtained from 3.1.1. For hybrid girders due account should be taken of the variation in design strength between the component parts.
4.4.4 Moment capacity 4.4.4.1 General. The moment-capacity for a section with
636 should be determined in accordance webs where dlt with 4.2.5 and 4.2.6.
d
t
<
i s the thickness of the web.
4.4.5.4 Design using tension field action 4.4.5.4.1 General. This clause may be used for the design
of internal and end panels providing the end panels are designed according to 4.4.5.4.2 or 4.4.5.4.3 as appropriate. .. . The shear buckling resistance of a stiffened panel is given by : Vb = qbdt If the flanges in the panel are not fully stressed the shear resistance may be increased to: Vb = (qb + q f d K 1 ) dt but where qb
qf
1
I
4.4.4.2 Sections with thin or slender webs. Where the

flanges of a section are plastic, Compact or semi-compact, but the web is thin (i.e. dlt 636) or slender (see table 71, the the moment capacity should be calculated using One following methods.
(a) The moment and axial load may be assumed to be resisted by the flanges alone (each flange being assumed to be subject t o uniform stressp,) and the web designed for shear only, see 4.4.5. (b) The moment and axial load may be assumed to be resisted by the whole section, the web being designed for combined shear and longitudinal stresses, see H.3. For a section with semi-compact flanges the moment in the web should be determined from simple elastic theory. For a section with plastic or compact flanges, simple plastic theory may be used. (c) A proportion of the loading may be assumed to be resisted by method (b), the remainder of the loading being resisted by method (a) and the web designed accordingly.
<0
. 6 dt ~ ~
i s the basic shear strength as obtained from tables 22(a) to (d) as appropriate; is the flange dependent shear strength factor s obtained from tables 23(a) to (d) a appropriate;
d
t Kf

is the thickness of the web; u 1 M,f f (1 4Mpw is the plast~c moment capacity of the smaller flange about its own equal area axis parallel to the flange;
-&-);
4.4.4.3 Sections with slender flanges. The moment capacity should be calculated from the reduced stress as given in 3.6. 4.4.5 Shear bucklinq resistance of thin webs 4.4.5.1 General. This clause applies t o webs which are
assumed to carry shear only, axial load and bending moment being carried entirely by the flanges. For webs carrying shear and direct stress, see H.3. Webs without intermediate stiffeners should be designed according to 4.4.5.3. Webswith intermediate stiffeners may be designed according to 4.4.5.3 or 4.4.5.4.
M,,
f
i s the mean longitudinal stress in the smaller flange due t o moment and/or axial load;
is the design strength of the flange;
p,, M,,
i s the plastic moment capacity of the web about its own equal area axis perpendicular to the web.
4.4.5.4.2 End panels designed not using tension field action (see figure 5). This clause may be used for the design
of end panels in girders designed using tension field action. I n this case the end panel should be designed according to 4.4.5.3. Additionally they should be checked as a beam spanning between the flanges of the girder capable of resisting a shear force R,.,and a moment M,, as given in 4.4.5.4.4
Webs with longitudinal stiffeners should be designed to BS 5400.
The end stiffener should be capable of resisting the reaction plus a compressive force due to the moment M ~ .
4.4.5.4.3 End panels designed using tension field action (see figures 6 and 7). This clause may be used for the design of end panels in girders designed using tension field action. In this case the end panel should be designed according to 4.4.5.4.1.
Additionally i t should be provided with an end post consisting of a single or double stiffener, see figures 6 and 7, satisfying the following. (a) Single stiffener, see figure 6. The top of the end post should be rigidly connected to the flange using full strength welds. The end post should be capable of resisting the reaction plus a moment from the anchor forces equal to *j3 Mfl; where Mfl i s obtained from 4.4.5.4.4. The width and thickness of the end post are not to exceed the width and thickness of the flange. (b) Double stiffener, see figure 7. The end post should be checked as a beam spanning between the flanges of the girder capable of resisting a shear force R* and a moment Mfl due to the anchor forcesasgiven in 4.4.5.4.4.
where
is the web depth; is the web thickness; is the applied shear stress in the panel utilizing tension field action; tension field action;
t
f,
q, is the basic shear strength of the panel utilizing q,, i s the critical shear strength for the panel designed
utilizing tension field action;

fv,
9 , and qcr are for the panel designed utilizing tension
field action, i.e. panel A in figure 5 and panel B in figures 6 and 7. If fv < q b then the value of Hq may be multiplied by the ratio:
4.4.5.4.4 Anchor force. The resultant longitudinal shear force Rtf and moment Mtfdue to the anchor force H, should be obtained from the following:
4.4.5.5 Panels with openings. Panels with an opening with any dimension greater than 10 % of the minimum panel dimension should be designed without using tension field action (see 4.4.5.3). The adjacent panels should be designed as an end panel as given in 4.4.5.4.2 or 4.4.5.4.3 as appropriate.
In addition reference should be made to 4.15.
Bearing stiffener
Panel B
C
Panel A
I
d
Panel A: designed utilizing tension field action. P a n d B: designed without utilizing tension field action and for longitudinal shear Rtf and moment M,+ (see 4.4.5.4.4). Boaring stiffonor: designed for the compressive force due to bearing plus the compression due to the moment Mtf.
Figure 5. End panel designed not using tension field action
Bearing s t r f f e n e r and end post
Panel B
Panel A
I?
Panel A: designed utilizing tension field action. Panel 8: designed utilizing tension field action. Bearing stiffener and end post: designed for combinat~on compressive loads due t o bearing and a of moment equal t o % MTfi
Figure 6. End panel designed using tension field action (single stiffener)
End post
Panel A: designed utilizing tension field action. Panel 0 : designed utilizing tension field action. Bearing stiffener: designed for compressive force due t o bearing. shear RTfand moment Mtf. End post: designed for hor~zontal
Figure 7. End panel designed using tension field action (double stiffener)
Table 21. Critical shear strength, qCr (in ~ / r n r n ~ )

(a)
p, =
265 ~/rnrn'
Stiffener spacing ratio ald
dlt
55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250
0.4 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 150 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 158 155 152 149 146 143 140 136 133 130 127 124 121 118 115 112 109
0.5 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 158 154 150 147 143 139 136 132 128 125 121 117 114 110 106 103 98 94 90 86 82 79 76
0.6
0.7 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 155 150 146 141 136 131 126 122 117 112 107 102 97 91 86 82 77 73 70 66 63 60 58 55 53 51 48 46 45
0.8 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 155 150 145 139 134 129 124 118 113 108 103 96 90 85 80 76 71 68 64 61 58 55 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 39 37
0.9 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 158 153 147 141 136 130 124 118 113 107 101 94 88 83 78 73 69 65 61 58 55 52 50 47 45 43 41 39 38 36 34 33 32
1.O 159 159 159 159 159 159 158 152 146 140 133 127 121 115 109 103 96 89 83 78 73 68 64 61 57 54 51 48 46 44 42 40 38 36 35 33 32 30 29 28
1.2 159 159 159 159 159 157 150 144 137 131 124 118 111 105 97 90 83 78 72 68 63 59 56 53 50 47 44 42 40 38 36 34 33 31 30 29 28 26 25 24
1.4
16
1.8 159 159 159 159 152 145 138 131 123 116 109 102 93 86 79 73
2.0 159 159 159 158 150 143 136 128 121 114 106 98 90 82 76 70 65 61 56 53 49 46 44 41 39 37 35 33 31 30 28 27 26 25 23 22 22 21 20 19
2.5 159 159 159 155 147 140 132 124 117 109 102 93 85 78 72 66 61 57 53 50 47 44 41 39 37 35 33 31 29 28 27 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 19 18
3.0 159 159 159 153 145 137 130 122 114 107 98 90 82 75 69 64 59 55 52 48 45 42 40 37 35 33 32 30 28 27 26 25 23 22 21 20 20 19 18 17
159 159 157 148 140 132 124 116 108 100 91 83 76 69 64 59 55 51 48 44 42 39 37 35 33 31 29 28 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 17 16
159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 158 154 150 145 141 137 133 128 124 120 116 111 107 103 98 93 88 84 80 76 73 70 67 64 61 59 56
159 159 159 159 158 152 145 138 131 124 118 111 104 96 88 82 76 71
159 159 159 159 155 148 141 134 127 120 113 106 98 90 83 77 71 66 61 67
68
63 59 55 51 48 45 43 40
38 36 34 32 31
66
61
58 54 51 48 45
43
54 61 47 45 42
40 38 36 34 32 31 29
40
38 36 35 33 31 30 29 27 26 25 24 23 22
!'29 28 27 2%. 27.'; 25 24 26 24 23 22 22 21 23 22 21 21 20
(b)
p, =
275 ~ / r n r n ~
Stiffener spacing ratio aid
dlt
55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250
0.4 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 162 158 155 152 149 146 142 139 136 133 130 126 123 120 117 114 110
0.5 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 162 158 154 150 146 142 138 134 131 127 123 119 115 111 107 103 98 94 90 86 82 79 76
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
12
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 162 158 153 149 144 140 135 131 126 122 117 113 108 103 98 93 88 84 80 76 73 70 67 64 61 59 56
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 164 159 154 149 144 139 134 129 123 118 113 108 103 97 91 86 82 77 73 70 66 63 60 58 55 53 51 48 46 45
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 159 154 148 142 137 131 126 120 114 109 103 96 90 85 80 76 71 68 64 61 58 55 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 39 37
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 162 156 150, 144 138 132 126 120 114 108 101 94 88 83 78 73 69 65 61 58 55 52 50 47 45 43 41 39 38 36 34 33 32
165 165 165 165 165 165 162 155 149 142 136 130 123 117 110 104 96 89 83 78 73 68 64 61 57 54 51 48 46 44 42 40 38 36 35 33 32 30 29 28
165 165 165 165 165 161 154 147 140 133 126 119 112 106 97 90 83 78 72 68 63 59 56 53 50 47 44 42 40 38 36 34 33 31 30 29 28 26 25 24
165 165 165 165 162 155 148 141 134 126 119 112 105 96 88 82 76 71 66 61
165 165 165 165 159 151 144 136 129 121 114 107 98 90 83 77 71 66 61 57 54 51 47 45 42 40 38 36 34 32 31 29 28 27 26 24 23 22 22 21
165 165 165 164 156 148 141 133 125 118 110 102 93 86 79 73 68 63 59 55 51 48 45 43 40 38 36 34 32 31 29 28 -27 25 24 23 22 21 21 20
165 165 16!5 162 154 146 138 131 123 115 107 98 90 82 76 70 65 61 56 53 49 46 44 41 39 37 35 33 31 30 28 27 26 25 23 22 22 21 20 19
165 165 165 158 150 142 134 126 118 110 102 93 85 78 72 66 61 57 53 50 47 44 41 39 37 35 33 31 29 28 27 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 19 18
165 165 165 157 148 140 132 124 116 108 98 90 82 75 69 64 59 55 52 48 45 42 40 37 35 33 32 30 28 27 26 25 23 22 21 20 20 18 18 17
165 165 160 152 143 135 126 118 110 100 91 83 76 69 64 59 55 51 48 44 42 39 37 35 33 31 29 28 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 17 16
58 54 51 48 45
43 40 38 36 35 33
$ 1
30
29 27 26 25 24 23 22
(C
p , = 340 ~ / r n r n ~
dlt
0.4
0.5 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 201 196 190 185 179 174 169 163 158 153 147 142 137 131 125 119 113 108 103 98 94 90 86 82 79 76
06
0.7 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 202 195 188 181 174 167 160 153 146 139 132 124 116 109 103 97 91 86 82 77 73 70 66 63 60 58 55 53 51
08
0.9
1.0 204 204 204 204 202 194 185 176 167 158 150 141 132 122 112 104 96 89 83 78 73 68 64 61 57 54 51 48 46 44 42 40 38 36 35 33 32 30 29 28
1.2 204 204 204 202 193 183 174 164 155 146 136 126 115 106 97 90 83 78 72 68 63 59 56 53 50 47 44 42 40 38 36 34 33 31 30 29 28 26 25 24
1.4 204 204 204 196 186 176 166 156 146 136 125 114 105 96 88 82 76 71 66 61
58 54 51 48 45
1.6
18
20 204 204 196 185 174 163 153 142 131 119 108 98 90 82 76 70 65 61 56 53 49 46 44 41 39 37 35 33 31 30 28 27 26 25 23 22 22 21 20 19
2.5 204 204 191 180 169 158 147 136 124 112 102 93 85 78 72 66 61 57 53 50 47 44 41 39 37 35 33 31 29 28 27 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 19 18
3.0 204 202 189 178 167 155 144 133 120 108 98 90 82 75 69 64 59 55 52 48 45 42 40 37 35 33 32 30 28 27 26 25 23 22 21 20 20 19 18 17
204 195 183 171 160 148 136 123 111 100 91 83 76 69 64 59 55 51 48 44 42 39 37 35 33 31 29 28 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 17 16
55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250
204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 202 198 194 189 185 180 176 172 167 163 158 154 150 145 141 136 132 127 122 117 112
204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 198 192 186 179 173 167 161 155 148 142 136 130 122 115 109 103 98 93 88 84 80 76 73 70 67
64
204 204 204 204 204 204 204 197 189 181 !74 166 158 151 143 135 127 118 110 103 96 90 85 80 76 71
204 204 204 204 204 202 194 186 177 169 161 153 144 136 127 117 109 101 94 88 83 78 73 69 65 61 58 55 52 50 47 45 43 41 39 38 36 34 33 32
204 204 201 191 181 171 160 150 140 129 117 107 98 90 83 77 71 66 61 57 54 51 47 45 42 40 38 36 34 32
204 204 198 188 177 167 156 146 135 123 112 102 93 86 79 73 68 63 59 55 51 48 45 43 40 38 36 34 32 31
68
64 61 58 55 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 39 37
43 40 38 36 35 33 31 30 29 27 26 25 24 23 22
31'; 29 2 9 ' 2 8 27 25 24 26' 24 23 22 22 21 23 22 21 21 20
61 59 56
48
46 45
(d)
p,
355 ~ I r n r n * .
dlt
0.4 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 208 204 199 194 190 185 180 175 171 166 161 157 152 147 143 138 132 127 122 117 112
0.5 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 212 207 201 195 190 184 178 172 167 161 155 150 144 138 132 125 119 113 108 103 98 94 90 86 82 79 76
0.6
0.7 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 208 200 193 186 178 171 163 156 148 141 133 124 116 109 103 97 91 86 82 77 73 70 66 63 60 58 55 53 51 48 46 45
0.8 213 213 213 213 213 213 210 202 194 186 178 169 161 153 145 137 127 118 110 103 96 90 85 80 76 71 68 64 61 58 55 52 50 48 46 44 42
0.9 213 213 213 213 213 208 199 190 182 173 164 155 146 137 127 117 109 101 94 88 83 78 73 69 65 61 58 55 52 50 47 45 43 41 39 38 36 34 33 32
1.0 213 213 213 213 208 199 190 180 171 161 152 143 132 122 112 104 96 89 83 78 73 68 64 61 57
54 51 48 46 44
1.2 213 213 213 208 198 188 178 168 158 ,148 138 126 115 106 97 90 83 78 72 68 63 59 56 53 50 47 44 42 40 38 36 34 33 31 30 29 28 26 25 24
1.4
1.6 213 213 207 196 185 174 163 152 142 129 117 107 98 90 83 77 71 66 61 57 54 51 47 45 42 40 38 36 34 32 31 29 28 27 26 24 23 22 22 21
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
213 200 188 175 163 150 138 123 111 100 91 83 76 69 64 59 55 51 48 44 42 39 37 35 33 31 29 28 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 17 16
55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250
213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 210 204 197 190 184 177 171 164 157 151 144 137 130 122 115 109 103 98 93 88 84 80 76 73 70 67 64 61 59 56
213 213 212 201 191 180 170 159 148 138 125 114 105 96 88 82 76 71 66 61 58 54 51
213 213 204 192 181 170 159 148 136 123 112 102 93 86 79 73 68 63 59 55 51 48 45 43 40 38 36 34 32 31 29 28 27 25 24 23 22 21 21 20
213 212 201 190 178 167 155 144 132 119 108 98 90 82 76 70 65 61 56 53 49 46 44 41 39 37 35 33 31 30 28 27 26 26 23 22 22 21 20 19
213 208 197 185 173 161 150 138 124 112 102 93 85 78 72 66 61 57 53 50 47 44 41 39 37 35 33 31 29 28 27 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 19 18
213 206 194 182 170 158 146 134 120 108 98 90 82 75 69 64 59 55 52
48
45 42 40 37 35 33 32 30 28 27 26 25 23 22 21 20 20 19 18 17
48
45 43 40 38 36 35 3% 31'
42 40 38 36 35 33 32 30 29 28
n
26 25 24 23 22
40
39 37
Table 22. Basic shear strength, q, (in ~ 1 r n t - n ~ )

(a)
p, =
265 ~ l r n r n '
Stiffener spacing ratio a l d
dlt
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250
159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139
159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 151 150 149 147 146 145 143 142 140 139 137 136 134 132 130 129 127 125 124 122
159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 150 149 147 145 144 142 140 138 136 134 132 130 128 125 123 121 119 117 116 114 113 111 110 109
159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 148 146 144 142 140 138 135 133 130 127 125 122 119 117 115 113 111 109 107 106 104 103 101 100 99 98
159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 150 147 145 143 140 137 135 132 129 126 122 119 116 114 111 109 107 105 103 101 99 98 96 95 94 92 91 90 89
159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 150 148 145 142 140 137 133 130 127 123 119 116 113 110 107 105 102 100 98 96 94 93 91 90 89 87 86 85 84 83 82
159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 150 147 144 141 137 134 131 127 123 118 114 111 108 105 102 99 97 95 93 91 89 88 86 85 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
159 159 159 159 159 159 159 149 145 142 138 134 130 126 121 116 112 108 104 100 97 94 92 89 87 85 83 82 80 78 77 76 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 68
159 159 159 159 159 159 149 145 141 137 133 128 124 118 113 108 104 100 96 93 90 87 84 82 80 78 76 74 73 71 70 69 68 66 65 64 64 63 62 61
159 159 159 159 159 151 147 142 138 133 129 124 118 112 107 102 97 94 90 87 84 81 79 76 74 72 71 69 67 66 65 63
159 159 159 159 159 149 145 140 135 130 125 120 113 107 102 97 93 89 85 82 79 76 74 72 70
68 66 65 63 62
159 159 159 159 159 148 143 138 133 127 122 116 109 103 98 93 89 85 81 78 75 73 70 68 66 64 63 61 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 49
159 159 159 159 150 145 140 134 128 122 116 109 102 96 91 86 82 78 75 71 69 66 64 61 59 58 56 54 53 52 50 49 48 47 46 45 45 44 43 42
159 159 159 159 148 143 137 131 125 119 111 104 97 91 86 81 77 73 70 67 64 61 59 57 55 53 52 50 49 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 39 38
160 59 58 62\, 61:. 57 56 6 0 ' 59 58 58 57 56 55 54 53 53 52
BS5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section four
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
(b)
p, = 275
~Irnrn~
Stiffener spacing ratio a l d

dit
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
12
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 1 1 0 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 145 144 143
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 156 155 153 152 150 149 148 146 144 143 141 140 138 136 134 132 130 129 127 125
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 155 153 152 150 148 146 144 142 140 138 136 133 131 128 126 124 122 120 119 117 116 114 113 112
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 155 153 151 148 146 144 141 139 136 133 130 127 125 122 120 118 116 114 112 110 108 107 105 104 103 102 101
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 157 154 152 149 147 144 141 138 135 132 128 125 122 119 116 114 111 109 107 105 103 102 100 99 97 96 95 94 93 92
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 155 152 150 147 143 140 137 134 130 125 122 118 115 112 109 107 105 102 100 99 97 95 94 92 91 90 88 87 86 85 84
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 154 151 148 145 141 137 134 130 125 121 117 113 110 107 104 102 99 97 95 93 91 90 88 87 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78
165 165 165 165 165 165 156 153 149 146 142 137 133 129 123 118 114 110 106 102 99 96 94 91 89 87 85 83 82 80 79 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69
165 165 165 165 165 165 153 149 145 141 136 131 126 120 115 110 105 101 98 94 91 89 86 84 82 80 78 76 74 73 7 70' 69 67
165 165 165 165 165 155 151 146 142 137 131 126 120 114 108 103 99 95 92 88 85 83 80 78 76 74 72 70 69 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
165 165 165 165 165 153 149 144 138 133 127 121 114 109 103 98 94 90 87 83 80 78 75 73 71 69 67 66 64 63 62 60 59 58 57 56 56 55 54 53
165 165 165 165 156 152 147 141 136 130 124 117 110 104 99 94 90 86 83 79 77 74 72 69 67 65 64 62 61 59
165 165 165 165 154 149 143 137 131 124 117 110 103 97 92 87 83 79 76 72 70 67 65 62
165 165 165 165 152 147 140 134 127 120 112 105 98 92 87 82 78 74 71 68 65 62 60 58 56 54 52 51 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 40
60
59 57 55 54 53 51 50 49 48 4j 46 45 45 44 43
58 57 56 55 54
53 52 51 50 50
66 65 64 64 63
39
(C
p, =
340 N/mm2
dlt
0.4 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 193 192 190 189 188 186 185 183 182 180 179 177 175 173 171 169 167
0.5 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 193 191 189 187 185 183 181 179 177 174 172 169 167 164 162 159 157 155 153 151 150 148 146
0.6 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 193 190 188 185 183 180 177 175 172 169 165 162 159 156 153 150 148 146 143 141 140 138 136 135 133 132 130
0.7 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 193 190 187 184 181 178 175 11 7 168 164 159 156 152 149 146 143 140 138 135 133 131 129 127 126 124 123 121 120 119 118
0.8 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 193 190 187 183 179 176 172 168 163 158 153 149 145 142 138 135 133 130 128 125 123 121 119 118 116 115 113 112 111 110 109 108
0.9 204 204 204 204 204 204 204 192 188 184 180 176 171 166 161 156 150 146 141 137 134 130 127 125 122 120 117 115 113 112 110 109 107 106 104 103 102 101 100 99
1.0 204 204 204 204 204 204 191 187 183 178 173 168 163 156 150 145 140 135 131 128 124 121 118 116 113
111 109 107 105 103
1 2 204 204 204 204 204 190 185 180 174 169 163 156 149 142 136 131 127 122 118 115 112 109 106 103 101 99 97 95 94 92 91 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
1.4 204 204 204 204 191 186 180 174 167 161 153 145 138 132 126 121 117 112 109 105 102 99 97 94 92 90 88 87 85 84 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73
1.6 204 204 204 194 188 182 176 169 162 154 145 137 130 124 119 114 109 105 101 98 95 92 90 87 85 83 82 80 78 77 76 74
1.8 204 204 204 192 186 179 172 164 157 148 139 131 124 118 112 107 103 99 95 92 89 87 84 82 80 78 76 74 73 7 1
2.0 204 204 204 190 183 176 169 161 153 143 134 126 119 113 107 103 98 94 91 87 85 82 79 77 75 73 72 70 68 67 66 65 63 62 61 61 60 59 58 57
2.5 204 204 194 187 179 171 162 154 144 134 125 117 110 104 99 94 89 86 82 79 76 73 7 1 69 67 65 63 62 60 59 58 57 55 54 53 53 52 5 1 50 50
3.0 204 204 192 184 176 167 158 149 138 128 119
111
55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250
104 98 93 88 84 80 76 73 70 68 65 63 61 59 58 56 55 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 46 45 44
102 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92
B70 '69 68 7.% 3, 67 72: 71" 66 70 69 68

68
65 64
67
63 62 62
BEST COPY AVAllABLE
Table 22 (conc/uded)
(d)
p ,
355 ~ / r n r n ~
dlt
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250
213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 202 201 199 198 196 195 193 191 190 188 186 185 183 181 179 177 175 173
213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 202 200 198 196 194 192 189 187 185 183 180 177 174 172 169 167 164 162 160 158 156 154 153 151
213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 202 200 197 195 192 189 186 183 180 177 173 170 166 163 160 157 155 152 150 148 146 144 142 140 139 137 136 135
213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 200 197 194 191 188 184 180 177 173 168 164 160 156 153 150 147 144 142 139 137 135 133 131 130 128 127 125 124 123 122
213 213 213 213 213 213 213 213 201 197 193 189 185 181 177 173 167 162 157 153 149 146 142 139 136 134 131 129 127 125 123 121 120 118 117 116 114 113 112 111
213 213 213 213 213 213 213 199 195 190 186 181 176 171 165 159 154 149 145 141 137 134 131 128 125 123 121 119 117 115 113 112 110 109 108 106 105 104 103 102
213 213 213 213 213 213 198 193 189 183 178 173 ,166 160 154 148 143 139 135 131 127 124 121 119 116 114 112 110 108 107 105 104 102 101 100 99 98
213 213 213 213 202 197 191 186 180 173 167 159 152 145 139 134 129 125 121 118 114 111 109 106 104 102 100 98 96 95 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84
213 213 213 213 198 192 186 179 172 165 156 148 141 135 129 124 119 115 111 108 105 102 99 97 95 93 92 89 87 86
213 213 213 201 194 188 181 173 166 157 148 140 133 126 121 116 111 107 104 100 97 94 92 90 87 85 84 82 80 79 78 76 75 74 73 72 71 71 -70 69
213 213 213 198 192 184 177 169 160 150 141 133 126 120 114 110 105 101 97 94 91 89 86 84 82 80 78 76 75 73 72 71 70 69
213 213 213 196 189 181 173 164 155 145 136 128 121 115 109 104 100 96 93 89 86 84 81 79 77 75 73 72 70 69
213 213 200 193 184 175 166 157 145 135 126 118 112 106 100 95 91 87 84 80 77 75 72 70 68 66 65 63 62 60
213 213 198 190 181 171 162 151 139 129 120 112 105 99 94 89 85 81 77 74 72 69 67 64 62 61 59 57 56 55 53 52 51 50 49 48 48 47 46 45
a
83
68
66 65 64 63 62 62 61 60 59
59
58 57 56 55 54 53 52 52 51
80 79 78 77 76 76
68
67 66 65 64 64
97
96 95
Table 23. Flange dependent shear strength factor, qf (in ~ / m m * )
(a,
p , = 265 ~ / r n m ?
dlt
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0 0 0 0 0 52 96 122 141 156 168 179 189 198 205 211 216 220 223 226 228 231 232 234 235 237 238 239 240 241 241 242 243 243 244 244 245 245 245 246 246
2.5
3.0 0 0 0 9
55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250-
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 116 151 178 202 223 242 260 276 291 305 319 332 344 356
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 86 133 166 194 218 239 258 275 292 307 321 335 348 360 374 387 399 409 419 427 435
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 91 138 172 200 224 245 264 282 298 313 327 341 356 370 382 392 402 411 418 425 432 438 443 448 452
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 79 132 168 197 221 243 262 279 296 311 325 340 354 366 377 386 394 402 408 414 420 425 429 433 437 441 444 447
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 81 133 168 197 221 242 261 278 293 308 324 338 350 360 369 377 384 390 396 401 405 409 413 417 420 423 425 428 430 432
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 29 110 151 182 207 229 248 266 281 296 312 325 336 346 354 361 368 373 378 383 387 391 394 397 400 402 405 407 409 411 412 414
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 51 116 155 184 208 228 247 263 278 293 307 318 328 336 343 349 355 359 364 367 371 374 377 379 382 384 386 388 389 391 392 394 395
0 0 0 0 0 0 67 120 154 180 201 219 235 250 264 277 288 297 304 310 316 321 325 329 332 335 337 340 342 344 346 347 349 350 351 352 354 355 355 356
0 0 0
0
0
44
0 0 0 0 0 79 119 145 165 182 196 209 221 232 241 248 254 259 263 267 270 272 275 277 279 280 282 283 285 286
0 0 0 0 27 92 122 144 162 176 188 199 210 219 226 231 236 240 244 246 249 251 253 255 256 258 259 260 261 262
0 0 0
. o
67 96 114 128 139 148 156 165 171 176 180 183 186 188 190 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 199 200 200 201 201 202 202 202 203 203 203 203 204
68
89 104 115 124 131 138 144 149 152 155 158 160 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 168 169 170 170 170 171 171 171 172 172 172 172 173 173 173 173
106 140 165 185 202 217 230 243 255 264 272 278 284 288 292 296 299 302 304 306 308 310 312 313 314 316 317 318 319 319 320 321 322 322
963 287 288 264 264 289'. 2 8 9 ' 265 290 265
291 291 292 292 293 266 266 267 267268
--
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Table 23 (continued) (b)

I
p, =
275 ~/rnrn*
dlt
(c)
p , = 340 ~ f r n r n '
dlt
0.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 103 167 212 249 280 309 334 357 379 399 419 437 454 470 486 504 521 536 550
0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 53 148 202 244 279 309 337 362 385 406 426 445 463 483 501 518 532 545 557 567 577 586 594 601 608
0.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 121 186 233 271 303 332 358 382 404 424 444 466 484 500 515 527 538 548 557 565 573 580 586 591 597 602 606 610
0.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 62 157 212 254 289 319 346 371 393 414 436 456 473 488 501 512 522 531 539 546 552 558 563 568 573 577
581 584 587 590 593
0.8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 143 202 245 281 312 339 363 385 407 429 447 462 475 486 496 504 512 519 525 530 535 540 544 548 551 554 557 560 562 565 567 569
0.9 0 0 0 0 0 0 79 164 216 256 288 317 342 365 387 408 426 440 453 464 473 481 488 494 500 505 509 513 517 520 523 526 529 531 533 535 537 539 540 542
1.0 0 0 0 0 0 81 164 214 252 284 312 336 357 380 399 414 427 438 447 455 462 468 473 478 482 486 489 493 495 498 500 503 505 506 508 510 511 512 514 515
1.2 0 0 0 0 85 160 207 242 270 295 316 337 356 371 384 394 402 410 416 421 426 430 434 437 440 443 445 447 449 451 453 454 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463
1.4
1.6 0 0 0 92 152 190 218 241 261 278 295 308 318 327 334 340 344 249 352 355 358 360 363 364 366 368 369 370 371 372
1.8
2.0 0 0 33 118 156 183 204 221 236 251 262 270 277 283 288 291 295 297 300 302 304 305 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 313 314 315 315 316 316 317 317 317 318 318
2.5 0 0 71 119 146 166 182 195 207 217 224 230 235 239 242 245 247 249 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 268 259 259 260 260 261 261 261 262 262 262 262 263 263
30 0 0 76 112 133 149 161 171 181 189 195 199 203 206 208 210 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 218 219 219 220 220 221 221 221 222 222 222 222 223 223 223 223 223
55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250
L
0 0 0 31 135 184 218 246 269 289 309 326 340 350 359 367 373 378 383 387 391 394 396 399 401 403 405 406 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 417 418
0 0 0 110 157 188 212 232 249 265 279 289 297 304 310 314 318 321 324 327 329 331 333 334 336 337 338 339 340 341
373 ? 3 4 2 342 374 375. 343 3 7 9 ' 343 344 376 377 378 378 379 379 345 345 345 346 346
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
--
(d
p , = 355 ~ / r n r n ~
Stiffener spacing ratio a / d
4.4.6 Design of intermediate transverse web stiffeners 4.4.6.1 General. lntermediate transverse stiffeners may be on one or both sides of the web. 4.4.6.2 Spacing. The spacing of intermediate stiffeners, where they are provided, should comply with 4.4.2, dependent on the thickness of the web. 4.4.6.3 Outstand of stiffeners. The outstand of the stiffeners should comply with 4.5.1.2. 4.4.6.4 Minimum stiffness. Transverse web stiffeners not
subject to external loads or moments should have a second moment of area, I , , about the centreline of the web such that:
Stiffeners subject to external loads and moments should meet the conditions for load carrying web stiffeners in 4.5.2 In addition they should satisfy the following interaction expression:
If Fq
< F,
then (Fq - F,)
should be taken as zero.
I n the equation above:
f , is the stiffener force given above; Pq is the buckling resistance of an intermediate web stiffener (see 4.5.1.5);
F,
I,
> 0 . 7 5 d t 3 for a 2 4 d 2
- o r a <\/2 f
a'
and Is> where d i s depth of the web; t is minimum required web thickness for spacing a using tension field action as given in 4.4.5.4.1; a i s the actual stiffener spacing.
P, 1 . 5 d 3t 3
d
is the external load or reaction; i s the buckling resistance of a load carrying stiffener (see 4.5.1.5);
is the moment on the stiffener due to eccentric applied load;
M ,
My, is the moment capacity of the stiffener based on its elastic modulus.
4.4.6.7 Connection to web of intermediate stiffeners.

lntermediate transverse stiffeners not subject t o external loading should be connected to the web to withstand a shear between each component and the web (in k N per millimetre run) of not less than: where t is the web thickness (in mm);
4.4.6.5 Additional stiffness for external loading. When

transverse web stiffeners are subject to lateral forces or to moments due t o eccentricity of transverse loads relative to the web, the minimum value of I , given in 4.4.6.4 should be increased by: (a) for lateral forces: 2 F D ' / E ~ ; (b) for moments: M , D 2 1 ~ t where
b, is the outstand of the stiffener (in mm).

For stiffeners subject to external loading the shear between the web and the stiffener due to such loading has to be added t o the above value. Stiffeners not subject to external loads or moments may terminate clear of the tension flange and in such a situation the distance cut short o n the line of the weld should be approximately 4t. Stiffeners should exte?d to the compression flange but need not be connecta to it.
k\
D is the overall depth of the section; E is the modulus of elasticity;

F i s the factored lateral force to be taken by the stiffener and deemed to be applied at the compression flange;
M, is the moment on the stiffener due to eccentric

applied load; t
i s the web thickness
No increase in the minimum value of I , is required for transverse loads in line with the web.
4.5 Web bearing, buckling and stiffener design

4.5.1 General 4.5.1.1 Introduction. This clause covers the design of webs
for beams and girders subject to loading through the flange parallel to the plane of the web. When the web of a member acting alone (i.e. without stiffeners) proves inadequate, stiffeners t o cover the following should be provided. (a) Load carrying stiffener: to prevent local buckling of the webdue to concentrated loading. See 4.5.2 and 4.5.4.
4.4.6.6 Buckling check on intermediate transverse web stiffeners. Stiffeners not subject to external loads or moments should be checked for a stiffener force:
where
V i s the maximum shear adjacent t o the stiffener

V, i s the shear buckling resistance of the web panel designed without using tension f ~ e l d action (see 4.4.5.3).
(b) Bearing stiffener: to prevent local crushing of the web due to concentrated loading. See 4.5.3 and 4.5.5. (c) Intermediate transverse web stiffener: to prevent buckling of a slender web due to shear. See 4.4.5 and 4.4.6. (d) Torsion stiffener: to provide torsional restraint to beams and girders at supports. See 4.5.8. (e) Diagonal stiffener: to provide local reinforcement of a web in shear and bearing. See 4.5.6.
4.5.1.5 Buckling resistance of stiffeners. The buckling resistance should be based on the compressive strength p, (see 4.7.5) of a strut using table 27(c), the radius of gyration being taken about the axis parallel to the web. The effective section is the full area or core area of the stiffener (see 4.5.1.2) together with an effective length of web on each side of the centreline of the stiffeners limited to 20 times the web thickness. The design strength used should be the minimum value The reduction of obtained for the web or the st~ffener. 20 N/mm2 referred to in 4.7.5 need not be taken unless the stiffener is attached to a welded section. The effective length for intermediate transverse stiffeners used in calculating the buckling resistance, P,, should be taken as 0.7 times the length of the stiffener. The effective length for load carrying web stiffeners used in calculating the buckling resistance, P,. assumes that the flange through which the load or reaction is applied is effectively restrained against lateral movement relative to the other flange. I t should be taken as: (a) flange restrained against rotation in the plane of the stiffener (by other structural elements):
( f ) Tension stiffener: to transmit tensile forces applied to a web through a flange. See 4.5.7.
The same stiffeners may perform more than one function and their design should comply with the requirements of those functions. 4.5.1.2 Outstand of web stiffeners. Unless the outer edge is continuously stiffened the outstand from the face of the web should not exceed 19t,~. When the outstand is between 13t,c and 19t,c then the stiffener design should be on the basis of a core section with an outstand of 1 3 t , ~ . 4.5.1.3 Stiff bearing length. The stiff bearing length, b I , is that length which cannot deform appreciably in bending. To determine b , the dispersion of load through a steel bearing should be taken as 45 O through solid material. See figure 8. 4.5.1.4 Eccentricity. Where a load or reaction i s applied eccentric to the centreline of the web or where the centroid of the stiffener does not lie on the centreline of the web, the resulting eccentricity of loading should be allowed for in design.
LE = 0 . 7 L
(b) flange not so restrained:
LE=L
where L is the length of the stiffener.
I? the load or reaction i s applied to the flange by a cornpression member, then unless effective lateral restraint is provided at that point, the stiffener should be designed as part of the compression member applying the load, and the connection should be checked for the effects of the strut action.
Figure 8. Stiff bearing length
4.5.2 Load carrying stiffeners 4.5.2.1 Web check. Load carrying web stiffeners should be provided where compressive forces applied through a flange by loads or reactions exceed the buckling resistance, P,, of the unstiffened web, where:
Pw = (bl + n l ) tp,
n,
is the length obtained by dispersion through the flange to the flange to web connection at a slope of 1 :2.5to the plane of the flange; i s the thickness of the web;
p v w is the design strength of the web
4.5.4 Design of load carrying stiffeners 4.5.4.1 Buckling check. The external load or reaction, F, , on a stiffener should not exceed the buckling resistance, P , of the stiffener a given in 4.5.1.5. s Where the stiffener also acts a an intermediate stiffener i t s should be checked for the effect of combined loads in accordance with 4.4.6.6. 4.5.4.2 Bearing check. Load carrying web stiffeners should also be of sufficient size that:
A>where
where
b, i s the stiff bearing length (see 4.5.1.3);
n 1 is the length obtained by dispersion at 45 half the depth of the section; t is the web thickness;
" through
p, is the compressive strength from 4.7.5 using s table 27(c) and A a follows. In determiningp, the slenderness, A, of an unstiffened web should be taken as 2.5dlt (where d is the depth of the web) provided that the flange through which the load or reaction i s applied is effectively restrained against: (a) rotation relative to the web; (b) lateral movement relative to the other flange. If these conditions are not met the slenderness, A, of the web, acting as a strut, should be determined in accordance with 4.5.1.5 for the appropriate end restraint.
0.8 F ,
pvs
F, i s the external load or reaction;

A is the area of the stiffener in contact with the flange;
p,, is the design strength of the stiffener.
4.5.2.2 Web check between stiffeners. The compressive , on the compression edge of a web, calculated as stress,,f follows, due t o loads or reactions applied direct, or through a flange, between web stiffeners, should not exceed the compressive strength for edge loading,.p ,
The compressive stress,,f , on the edge of a panel between two web stiffeners should be calculated as follows. (a) Divide point loads and distributed loads shorter than the smaller panel dimension by the smaller panel dimension a or d. (b) Add the intensity (forcelunit length) of any other distributed loads. (c) Divide by the web thickness t. When the compression flange is restrained against rotation relative to the web:
4.5.5 Design of bearing stiffeners

Bearing stiffeners should be designed for the applied load or reaction less the local capacity of the web a given in 4.5.3. s Where the web and the stiffener material are of different strengths the lesser value should be assumed to calculate the capacity of the web and the stiffener.
4.5.6 Design of diagonal stiffeners

Diagonal stiffeners should be designed to carry the portion of the applied shear and bearing that exceeds the capacity of the web. Where the web and the stiffener are of different strengths the value taken for design should be taken a given in 4.5.5. s
4.5.7 Design of tension stiffeners

Tension stiffeners sh&ld be designed to carry the portion of the applied load or reaction less the capacity of the web as given in 4.5.3 f a . bearing stiffeners. Where the web andthe stiffener are of different strengths the value taken for design should be taken as given in 4.5.5.
OR when the compressionflange i s not so restrained:
4.5.8 Torsion stiffeners

where a is the distance between transverse web stiffeners. Where bearing stiffeners are required to provide torsional restraint at the supports of the beam, they should meet the following criteria. (a) The conditions of 4.5.3. (b) The second moment of area of the stiffener section , should be such that: about the centreline of the web, I , I, 2 0.34 a , ~ 'T, where
a, = 0.006 for A Q 50;
4.5.3 Bearing stiffeners

Bearing stiffeners should be provided for webs where forces applied through a flange by loads or reactions exceed the local capacity of the web at i t s connection to the flange given by:
( b l +%)tp,,
where bl
i s the stiff bearing length (see 4.5.1.3);
a = 0.3Ih for 50 < A , a , T ,

= 30/A2 for
< 100; > 100;
4.6.2 Eccentric connections

When members are connected eccentric to the axis of the member the resulting moment has to be allowed for in accordance with 4.8.2, except for angles, channels and T-sections designed to 4.6.3 or 4.6.4 which may be treated as axially loaded members.
D i s overall depth of beam at support; is the maximum thickness of compression flange of the span under consideration;
= L,/ry
A
L,
for the beam;
is the effective length of the beam.
4.6.3 Effective areas of simple tension members 4.6.3.1 Single angles, channels and T-sections. For single
angle ties connected through one leg only, single channel sections connected only through the web, and T-sections connected only through the flange, the effective area should be taken as the net area of the connected leg, plus the area of the outstanding leg multiplied by: 3a1 3al + a 2 where a, i s the net sectional area of the connected leg as given in 3.3.2; a i s the sectional area of the unconnected leg. , For double angle ties, connected to one side of a gusset or section, the angles may be designed individually as given above.
4.5.9 Connection t o web of load carrying and bearing

stiffeners Stiffeners which resist loads or reactions applied through a flange should be connected to the web by sufficient welds or fasteners to transmit a design force equal to the lesser of: (a) the tension capacity of the stiffener; (b) the sum of the forces applied when they act in the same direction or the larger of the forces when they act in opposite directions. Stiffeners which d o not extend right across the web should be of such length that the shear stress in the web due to the design force transmitted by the stiffener does not exceed the shear strength of the web. In addition, the capacity of the web beyond the end of the stiffener should be sufficient to resist the applied force.
4.5.10 Connection t o flanges: stiffeners i n tension

Stiffeners required t o resist tension should be connected to the flange transmitting the load by continuous welds or non-slip fasteners.
4.6.3.2 Double angles. For back-to-back double angles

connected to one side of a gusset or section which are: (a) in contact or separated by a distance not exceed~ng the aggregate thickness of the parts with solid packing pieces; (b) connected by bolts or welding such that the slenderness of the individual components does not exceed 80; then the effective area. A, may be taken as the net area of , the connected legs plus the area of the outstanding legs multiplied by:
4.5.1 1 Connection t o flanges: stiffeners in compression

Stiffeners required to resist compression should either be fitted against the loaded flange or connected by continuous welds or non-slip fasteners. The stiffener should be fitted against or connected to both flanges when: (a) a load i s applied directly over a support; or (b) i t forms the end stiffener of a stiffened web; or (c) it acts as a torsion stiffener.
5.3,
where a, is thp net sectional area of the connected parts as g i v d in 3.3.2; a, Ifthe sectional area of the unconnected parts.
N O T E . Xhe area of the leg of an angle should be taken as the product of the th~ckness the length from the outer corner mlnus by half the thtckness, and the area of the leg of a T-section as the product o f the thickness b y the depth minus the thickness of the flange.
4.5.1 2 Hollow sections

Where concentrated loads are applied to hollow sections consideration should be given to local stresses and deformations and the section reinforced as necessary.
4.6 Axially loaded tension members

4.6.1 Tension capacity
The tension capacity, PI, of a member should be taken from:
4.6.3.3 Other types. The following types of members should be designed using the net area from 3.3.2 and
treated as axially loaded members. (a) Single angle ties connected through both legs by lug angles or otherwise, single channel sections connected by both flanges and T-sections connected only through the leg or both the flange and the leg. (b) Double angle ties connected to both sides of a gusset or section provided that the components are held
P, = Aepy where A, is the effective area of the section as determined from 3.3.3 or 4.6.2 to 4.6.4.
longitudinally parallel and connected by bolts or welds in a t least two places and held apart by solid packing pieces. The outermost of such connections should be a t a distance from each end of approximately nine times the smallest leg length. The bolts should be of the same diameter a the end connections. s (c) The internal bays of continuous ties.
Table 24. Nominal effective length, L E , for a strut

NOTE. For angle, channel and T-section struts, see 4.7.10.
Conditions of restraint at ends (in plane under consideration)
Effective length, L E
Effectively held in position a t both ends Restrained in direction at both ends Partially restrained in direction at both ends Restrained in direction at one end
4.6.4 Laced or battened ties

Any lacing or battening systems should be designed to resist the greater of the following. (a) Forces and/or moments induced by eccentric loads, applied moments or transverse forces, including self weight and wind resistance. (b) Forces and/or moments induced by a transverse shear on the complete member at any point in its length equal to 1 % of the factored axial load in the member. These forces may be taken as shared equally between all transverse lacing or battening systems in parallel planes.
0.7 L
0.85 L
0.85 L
NOT restrained in direction at either end

One end Other end
1.OL
4.7 Compression members

4.7.1 General 4.7.1.1 Length. The length, L, of a compression member in
any plane should be taken as the distance between the points at which i t has effective positional or directional restraint against buckling in that plane.
Effectively held in position and restrained in d~rection
Not held in position
Effectively restrained in direction Partially restrained in direction
1.2L
1.5L
2.0 L
4.7.1.2 Restraints. A restraint should have sufficient

strength and stiffness to inhibit movement of the restrained point in position or direction a appropriate. s Positional restraints should be connected to an appropriate shear diaphragm or system of triangulated bracing. Positional restraints t o compression members forming the flanges of lattice girders should satisfy the recommendations for lateral restraint of beams given in 4.3.2. All other positional restraints to compression members should be capable of resisting a force of not less than 1 % of the axial force in the restrained member and transferring it to the adjacent points of positional restraint.
NOT restrained in direction
(c) For stanchions in single storey buildings of simple construction see D.1. (d) For members forming part of a frame with rigid joints see appendix E.
4.7.3 Slenderness 4.7.3.1 General. The value of the slenderness, A, should be

taken as the effective,kngth, L E , divided by the radius of gyration about the relkxant axis except as given in 4.7.9 for battened struts or 4.7.13 for back-to-backstruts. '-. 4.7.3.2 Maximum Senderness. The value of A should not exceed the following: (a) for members resisting loads other than wind loads (b) for members resisting self weight and wind loads only 180
4.7.2 Effective lengths

For angles, channels and T-sections the effective length should be determined from its length centre-to-centre of intersections with restraining members in accordance with the conditions of restraint in the appropriate plane as given s in table 24 or a limited by 4.7.10. In other cases the effective length, LE , should be determined from the actual length and the conditions of restraint in the relevant plane, as follows. (a) In determining the conditions of restraint, restraining members which under the same loading conditions are required to carry more than 90 % of their reduced moment capacity (i.e. reduced for axial load) should be taken as incapable of providing directional restraint to the member under consideration. (b] For standard conditions of restraint see table 24.
250
(c) for any member normally acting as a tie but subject to reversal of stress resulting from the action of wind 350
Members whose slenderness exceeds 180 should be checked for self weight deflection. If this exceeds length/1000 the effect of bending should be taken into account in design.
4.7.4 Compression resistance The compression resistance, PC,of a member should be obtained from: (a) for plastic, compact or semi-compact sections: P =A,pc C (b) slender sections:
For single angle, channel and T-section struts reference should be made to 4.7.10. 4.7.5 Compressive strength The compressive strength,^,, depends on the slenderness, h, of the gross section, the design strength,^,, or the reduced design strength for slender sections (see 3.6) and the relevant strut curve. p c may be established first by reference to tables 25 and 26. These indicate, for any shape, thickness of steel and axis of buckling, which of the four strut tables 27(a) to (d), is relevant to the case. A1ternati~ely.p~ be obtained may from the formula given in appendix C. For sections fabricated from plate by welding, the value of p, should be reduced by 20 N/mmz.
P = Ag P C S C where
A ,
is the gross sectional area (see 3.3.1);
p c i s the compressive strength (see 4.7.5);
pcs is the compressive strength for slender sections
(see 4.7.5 and 3.6). Steel sections encased in structural concrete may be designed as cased struts in accordance with 4.14.
Table 25. Strut table selection

Type of section Thickness (see note 11 A x i s of buckling
X-X
Y-Y
Hot-rolled structural hollow section Rolled I-section (or a shown in table 26(a)) s Rolled H-section (or as shown in table 26(a)) up to 40 mm over 40 mm up to 40 mm over 40 mm up to 40 mm over 40 mm up to 40 mm over 40 mm up to 40 mrn over 40 mm
27(a) 27(a) 27(b) 27k) 27(b) 27(b) 27(b) 27(~) 27(b) 27(~) 27(b) 27(c)
27(a) 27(b) 27(~) 27(d) 27(~) 27(d) 27(a) 27b) 27(b) 27(~) 27(b) 27(c)
Welded plate Ior H-section (see note 2 and 4.7.5) (or a shown in table 26(c)) s Rolled Ior H-sectionwith welded flange cover plates (as shown in table 26(b)) Welded box section (see note 3 and 4.7.5)
Round, square or flat bar
Rolled angle Rolled channel or T-section Two rolled sections laced or battened Two rolled sections back-to-back Compound rolled sections
Buckling about any axis 27(~)
NOTE 1. For thicknesses between 4 0 m m and 50 m m the value of p, may be taken as the average of the values l o r thicknesses u p t o 4 0 mm and over 4 0 m m .
NOTE 2. For welded plate 1 o r H-sections where i t can be guaranteed that the edges of the flanges w i l l only be flamecut, table 27(bl may be used for buckling about the y - y axis for flanges up to 40 mrn t h i c k r a n d table 27(cI for flanges over 4 0 m m thick.
NOTE 3. 'Welded b o x section' includes any box section fabr~cated from plates or rolled sections, provided that all longitudinal welds are near the corners of the section. Box sectlons w i t h welded longitudinal stiffeners are not
included i n this category.
Table 26. Type of section obtained for table 25 (a) Rolled I or H-section
?$
fi
U
0.25 <-B U
< 0.8
NOTE. Large outstands may be subject to local buckling, see 3.6.
(b) Rolled I or H-section with welded flange cover plate
.!jqjj
i j F
B
- > 0.8 B
(c) Welded plate I or H-section
5
- d 0.25 B U
NOTE. Large ourstands
may be subject to
local buckling, see 3.6.
---
- -
--
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
Table 2 7 f a ) . Compressive strength,^,, (in ~ / m m ' for struts )
225 15 20 25 30 35 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98 225 225 222 220 217 214 213 212 210 209 208 206 205 203 201 200 198 196 194 192 189 187 184 182 179 176 173 170 167 164 161 158 154 151 147
245 245 244 241 239 236 233 231 230 228 227 225 223 222 220 218 216 214 211 209 206 204 201 198 194 191 188 184 181 177 173 169 166 162 158 154
255
265 265 264 261 258 254 251 249 248 246 244 242 241 238 236 234 232 229 226 223 220 217 214 210 206 202 198 194 190 186 181 177 173 168 164 159
275 275 273 270 267 264 260 258 257 255 253 251 249 247 244 242 239 236 234 230 227 224 220 216 212 208 203 199 194 190 185 180 176 171 166 162
305 305 303 299 296 292 287 285 283 281 279 277 274 271 268 265 262 259 255 251 247 242 237 233 227 222 217 211 206 200 195 189 184 179 173 168
320 320 317 314 310 306 301 299 297 294 292 289 286 283 280 277 273 269 265 261 256 251 246 240 235 229 223 217 211 205 199 193 188 182 176 171
325 325 322 318 315 310 305 303 301 299 296 293 291 287 284 281 277 273 268 264 259 254 248 243 237 231 225 219 213 207 200 195 189 183 177 172
335 335 332 328 324 320 315 312 310 307 305 302 299 295 292 288 284 280 275 270 265 259 253 247 241 235 229 222 216 209 203 197 191 185 179 173
1
340 340 337 333 329 324 319 317 314 312 309 306 303 299 296 292 288 283 278 273 268 262 256 250 243 237 230 224 217 211 204 198 192 186
355
395
410
415 414 410 405 399 393 386 383 379 375 371 367 362 366 350 344 337 330 322 314 306 297 288 279 270 261 252 243 235 226 218 211 203 196 189 183
430
450 448 444 438 432 425 417 413 409 404 399 394 388 381 374 366 358 349 340 330 320 310 299 289 279 269 259 250 240 231 223 215 207 200 192 186
255 254 251 248 245 242 240 239 237 236 234 232 230 228 226 224 221 219 216 213 210 207 204 200 197 193 189 185 181 177 173 169 165 161 157
355 351 347 343 338 333 330 327 325 322 318 315 311 307 303 298 293 288 282 276 270 264 256 249 242 235 228 221 214 208 201 194 188 182 176
394 390 386 381 375 368 365 362 359 355 351 346 342 336 331 325 318 311 304 296 288 280 272 264 255 247 239 231 223 215 208 201 194 187 181
409 405 400 395 389 382 378 375 371 367 363 358 353 347 341 335 328 320 312 304 295 287 278 269 260 251 243 234 226 218 211 203 196 190 183
429 424 419 414 407 399 396 392 388 383 379 373 367 361 354 347 339 331 322 313 303 294 284 275 265 256 247 238 229 221 213 206 198 191 185
do
114
Table 27 (a) (concluded}

325 167 161 156 152 147 143 138 134 130 126 123 119 116 113 109 106 99 93 87 335 168 163 158 153 148 144 139 135 131 127 123 120 116 113 110 107 100 93 87 82 77 73 69 65 61 58 55 52 50 48 43 40 36 33 31
29 27 25 23 22
225 100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 124 126 128 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 144 141 137 134 131 127 124 121 118 115 112 109 107 104 101 99 93 87 82 78 73 69 65 62 59 56 53 51 48 46 42 38 35 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
245 150 146 142 139 135 132 128 125 121 118 115 112 109 106 104 101 95
255 153 149 145 141 137 133 130 126 123 120 116 113 110 107 105 102 96 90 84 79 75 70 67 63 60 57 54 51 49 47 42 39 36 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
265 155 151 147 143 139 135 131 128 124 121 118 114 111 108 105 103 96 90 85 80 75 71 67 63 60 57 54 51 49 47 42 39 36 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
275 157 153 149 145 141 137 133 129 125 122 119 115 112 109 106 103 97 91 85 80 75 71 67 64 60 57 54 52 49 47 43 39 36 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
305 163 158 154 149 145 140 136 132 129 125 121 118 115 111 108 105 98 92 86 81 76 72 68 64 61
320 166 161 156 151 146 142 138 134 130 126 122 119 116 112 109 106 99 93 87 82 77 72 68 65 61 58 55 52 50 47 43 39 36 33 31 29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16
340 169 163 158 153 149 144 140 135 131 127 124 120 117 113 110 107 100 94 88 82 77 73" 69 65 61 58 55 53 50 48 43 40 36 33 31 29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16
355 1.71 165 160 155 150 145 141 136 132 128 125 121 117 114 111 108 101 94 88 83 78 73 69 65 62 58 55 53 50 48 43 40
395 175 169 163 158 153 148 143 139 135 130 127 123 119 116 112 109 102 95 89 83 78 74 70 66 62 59 56 53 50
48
410 176 170 165 159 154 149 144 140 135 131 127 123 120 116 113 110 102 95 89 84 79 74 70 66 62 59 56 53 51 48 44 40 37 34 31 29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16
415 177 171 165 159 154 149 144 140 135 131 127 123 120 116 113 110 102 96 89 84 79 74 70 66 62 59 56 53 51 48 44 40 37 34 31 29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16
430 178 172 166 160 155 150 145 141 136 132 128 124 120 117 113 110 103 96 90 84 79 74 70 66 62 59 56 53 51 48 44 40 37 34 31 29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16
450 179 173 167 161 156 151 146 141 137 133 129 125 121 117 114 111 103 96 90 89 79 74 70 66 63 59 56 53 51 48 44 40 37 34 31 29 27 25 23 22 21 19 18 17 16
89
84 79 74 70 66 63 59 56 54 51 49 46 42 39 35 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
82
77 72 68 65 61 58 55 52 50 47 43 39 36 33 31 29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16
58 55 52 49 47
43 39 36 33 31 28 26 25 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
3 G .
3
31
44 40 37 34 31 29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16
',29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16
20 19 18 17 16
Table 27(b). Compressive strength,p,,
(in ~ / m r n ' )for struts
225
245
255
265
275
305
320
325
335
340 340 334 328 321 313 305 302 298 294 291 286 282 278 273 268 263 258 252 247 241 235 230 224 218 212 206 200 195 189 183 178 173 ,168 3 158
355
395 394 387 379 371 361 351 347 342 337 332 327 321 315 309 302 295 288 281 274 267 259 252 244 237 230 222 215 209 202 195 189 183 177 171 166 161 156 151 146 142
410 409 401 393 384 374 364 359 354 349 343 337 331 325 318 311 304 296 289 281 273 265 257 249 241 234 226 219 212 205 198 192 185 179 173 168 162 157 152 148 143
415 413 406 397 389 379 368 363 358 352 347 341 334 328 321 314 306 299 291 283 275 267 259 251 243 235 227 220 213 206 199 192 186 180 174 168 163 158 153 148 143
430 428 420 411 402 392 380 375 369 364 358 351 349 337 330 322 314 306 298 289 281 272 264 255 247 239 231 223 216 208 201 195 188 182 176 170 164 159 154 149 144
450 447 439 430 420 409 396 391 385 379 372 365 358 350 342 333 325 316 307 298 288 279 270 261 252 244 235 227 219 212 204 197 191 184 178 172 166 161 156 151 146
15 20 25 30 35 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 102 104 106 108
225 224 220 216 211 207 205 203 201 199 197 195 192 190 188 185 183 180 178 175 172 169 167 164 161 158 155 152 149 146 143 139 136 133 130 127 124 122 119 116
245 243 239 234 229 224 222 220 218 215 213 210 208 205 202 200 197 194 191 188 185 181 178 175 171 168 164 161 157 154 150 147 143 140 137 133 130 127 124 121
255 253 248 243 238 233 231 228 226 223 221 218 215 213 210 207 204 200 197 194 190 187 183 180 176 172 169 165 161 158 154 150 147 143 139 136 132 129 126 123
265 263 258 253 247 241 239 237 234 231 229 226 223 220 217 214 210 207 203 200 196 193 189 185 181 177 173 169 165 161 157 153 150 146 142 138 135 131 128 125
275 272 267 262 256 250 248 245 242 239 237 234 230 227 224 221 217 213 210 206 202 198 194 190 186 181 177 173 169 165 161 156 152 148 145 141 137 133 130 126
305 301 295 289 283 276 273 270 267 263 260 256 253 249 245 241 236 232 227 223 218 213 208 204 199 194 189 184 179 174 169 165 160 156 151 147 143 139 135 131
320 315 309 303 296 288 285 282 279 275 271 267 263 259 255 250 246 241 236 231 226 220 215 210 205 199 194 189 183 178 173 168 164 159 154 150 146 141 137 133
325 320 314 307 300 293 289 286 283 279 275 271 267 263 258 254 249 244 239 233 228 223 217 212 206 201 196 190 185 180 175 170 165 160 155 151 146 142 138 134
335 330 323 316 309 301 298 294 291 287 283 278 274 269 265 260 255 249 244 239 233 227 222 216 210 204 199 193 188 182 177 172 167 162 157
355 349 342 335 327 318 314 310 306 302 298 293 288 283 278 272 266 261 255 249 242 236 230 223 217 211 205 199 193 187 181 176 171 165 160 155 151 146 142 138
152 I 1 5 3 148 149 144 144 139 140 135 136
Table 27(b) (concluded)
225 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 124 126 128 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 113 111 108 105 103 100 98 96 94 91 89 84 79 75 71 67 64 60 57 55 52 49 47 45 43 39 36 33 31 29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16 15
245 118 115 112 109 106 104 101 99 96 94 92 86 81 77 72 69 65 61 58 56 53 50 48 46 44 40 37 34 31 29 27 25 23 22 21 19 18 17 16 15
255 120 117 114 111 108 105 103 100 97 95 93 87 82 78 73 69 66 62 59 56 53 51 48 46 44 40 37 34 31 29 27 25 23 22 21 19 18 17 16 15
265 121 118 115 112 109 107 104 101 99 96 94 88 83 78 74 70 66 63 59 56 54 51 48 46 44 40 37 34 31 29 27 25 24 22 21 19 18 17 16 15
275 123 120 117 114 111 108 105 102 100 97 95 89 84 79 74 70 66 63 60 57 54 51 49 47 44 41 37 34 32 29 27 25 24 22 21 19 18 17 16 15
305 128 124 121 117 114 111 108 105 103 100 97 91 86 81 76 72 68 64 61 58 55 52 49 47 45 41 38 35 32 29 27 26 24 22 21 20 18 17 16 15
320 130 126 123 119 116 113 110 107 104 101 98 92 87 81 77 72 68 65 61 58 55 52
325 130 127 123 120 116 113 110 107 104 101 99 93 87 82 77 72 68 65 61 58 55 52 50 48 45 41 38 35 32 30 28 26 24 22 21 20 18 17 16 15
335 131 128 124 121 117 114 111 108 105 102 99 93 87 82 77 73 69 65 61 58 55 53 50 48 46 42 38 35 32 30 28 26 24 22 21 20 18 18 17 16
340 132 128 125 121 118 114 111 108 105 102 100 93 88 82 77 73 69 65 62
355 134 130 126 122 119 116 112 109 106 103 101 94 88 83 78 73 69 66 62 59 56 53 51 48 46 42 38 35 32 30 28 26 -24 e 3 '21
395 137 133 129 125 122 118 115 112 109 106 103 96 90 84 79 75 70 66 63 59 56 54 50 48 46 42 39 35 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
410 139 134 130 126 123 119 116 112 109 106 103 96 90 85 80 75 71 67 63 60 57 54 51 49 46 42 39 35 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
415 139 135 131 127 123 119 116 113 110 106 104 97 91 85 80 75 71 67 63 60 57 54 51 49 46 42 39 35 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
430 140 136 132 128 124 120 117 113 110 107 104 97 91 85 80 75 71 67 63 60 57 54 51 49 47 42 39 36 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
450 141 137 133 129 125 121 118 114 111 108 105 98 92 86 81 76 71 67 64 60 57 54 52 49 47 43 39 36 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16
58
55 53 50 48 46 42 38 35 32 30 28 26 24 22 21
50 47 45
41 38 35 32 30 28 26 24 22 21 20 18 17 16 15
2 0 1 2 0 1 8 ' 1 9 18 18 17 17 16 16
Table 27(cl. Compressive rtrength,~., (in ~ l r n m ' for struts )
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

Section four
Table 27(dl. Compressive strength,p,, (in ~ / r n m ') for struts
Table 27(d) (concludedl

255 95 92 90 88 86 84 82 81 79 77 75 7 1 67 64 61 58 55 52 50 47 45 43 4 1 40 38 35 32 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 265 96 94 92 90 88 86 84 82 80 78 76 72 275 98 96 94 91 89 87 85 83 81 79 77 73 69 66 62 59 56 53 5 1 48 46 44 42 40 39 35 33 30 28 26 24 23 2 1 20 19 18 1 7 16 15 14 305 103 101 98 96 93 91 89 87 84 83 81 76 72 68 64 6 1 58 55 52 50 47 45 43 4 1 40 36 33 3 1 29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 320 105 103 100 98 95 93 91 88 86 84 82 77 73 69 65 62 59 56 53 50 48 46 44 42 40 37 34 3 1 29 27 25 23 22 21 19 18 17 16 15 14 325 106 103 101 98 96 94 9 1 89 87 85 83 78 74 70 66 62 59 56 53 5 1 48 46 44 42 40 37 34 3 1 29 27 25 24 22 2 1 19 18 1 7 16 1 5 14 335 108 105 102 99 97 94 92 90 88 85 83 79 74 70 66 63 59 56 54 5 1
48 46 44 42 40
225 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 124 126 128 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 88 86 84 83 81 79 77 76 74 72 7 1 67 64 60 58 55 52 50 47 45 43 42 40 38 36 34 3 1 29 27 25 23 22 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 14
245 93 90 88 86 84 83 81 79 77 75 74 70 66 63 59 57 54 5 1 49 47 45 42 41 39 37 34 32 29 27 25 24 22 21 20 18 17 16 15 15 14
340 108 105 103 100 97 95 93 90 88 86 84 79 74 70 66 63 60 57 54 5 1 49 46 44 42 4 1 37 34 32 29 27 25 24 22 21 19
355 110 107 104 102 99 96 94 92 89 87 85 80 75 7 1 67 64 60 57 54 52 49 47 45 43 41 37 34 32 29 27 25 24 , 22
395 115 112 109 106 103 100 97 95 93 90 88 83 78 73 69 65 62 59 56 53 50 48 46 44 42 38 35 32 30 28 26 24 23 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15
410 116 113 110 107 104 102 99 96 94 92 89 84 79 74 70 66 63 59 56 54 5 1 48 46 44 42 39 35 33 30 28 26 24 23 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15
415 117 114 110 107 105 102 99 96 94 92 89 84 79 74 70 66 63 59 56 54 51 48 46

44
430 118 115 112 109 106 103 100 97 95 93 90 85 80 75 7 1 67 63 60 57 54 5 1 49 47 44 42 39 36 33 30 28 26 24 23 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15
450 120 117 113 110 107 104 102 99 96 94 91 86 81 76 7 1 67 64 60 57 54 52 49 47 45 43 39 36 33 30 28 26 24 23 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15
68
65 6 1 58 55 53 50 4% 46 43 42 40 38 35 32 30 28 26 24 23 2 1 20 19 18 1 7 16 15 14
42 39 35 33 30 28 26 24 23 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
37 34 3 1 29 27 25 24 22 21 -19 18 17 16 15 14
'gl
'0 2
18 :!I8 17 17 16 16 15 15 15 14
4.7.6 Eccentric connections Moments due to eccentricity of connections should be calculated and allowed for in design in accordance with 4.8 except as follows. (a) Columns i n simple construction. The eccentricity o f . the beam end reactions or other loads should be a s follows.
(1) For a beam supported on the cap plate, the load should be taken as acting at the face of the column, or edge of packing if used, towards the span of the beam.
M , i s the nominal moment about the major axis; M y is the nominal moment about the minor axis;
Mbs the buckling resistance moment for simple is columns; ZY i s the elastic modulus about the minor axis;
p ,
is the design strength.
The buckling resistance moment for simple columns M bs should be taken a the value of Mbdetermined a descr~bed s s in 4.3.7.3 and 4.3.7.4 but using the equivalent slenderness hLT of the column given by:
= 0.5 (Llr,)
(2) For a roof truss supported on the cap plate, eccentricity may be neglected provided simple connections are used which do not develop significant moments adversely affecting the structure.
(3) In all other cases the load should be taken a s acting at a distance from the face of the steel column equal to 100 mm, or at the centre of the length of stiff bearing whichever gives the greater eccentricity.
(b) Laced, battenedstrutsand batten-starredangle struts. These may be treated a single integral members s and designed as axially loaded struts in accordance with 4.7.8,4.7.9 and 4.7.11 respectively.
where L is the distance between levels at which both axes are restrained;
ry i s the radius of gyration about the minor axis.
NOTE. For circular hollow sections and for box sections of uniform wall thickness, including RHS,within the limits given in 8.2.6.1. Mb, equalspyS,.
4.7.8
Laced struts
A laced strut consisting of two or more main components may be designed as a single integral member, provided that the following conditions are met.
(a) The main components are effectively restrained against buckling by a lacing system of flats or sections. (b) The lacing comprises an effectively triangulated system on each face and as far as practicable the lacing should not vary throughout the length of the member. (c) Except for the panels referred to in (f), double intersection lacing systems and single intersection lacing systems mutually opposed in direction on opposite sides of two main components should not be combined with members or diaphragms perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the strut unless all forces resulting from the deformation of the strut members are calculated and allowed for in the design. (d) Single lacing systems mutually opposed in direction on opposite sides of two main components should not be ~sed~unless resulting torsional effects are allowed the !" for. (e) All lacings, whether in double or single intersection sysths, should be inclined at an angle between 40 O and M " to the axis of the member.
(f) Tie panels should be provided at the ends of the lacing systems, at points where the lacing i s interrupted, and at connections with other members.
(c) Angles, channels and T-sections. The effect of eccentric end connections may be neglected and the members designed in accordance with 4.7.10.
(d) Continuous construction. This should be in accordance with section five. 4.7.7 Columns in simple construction In structures of simple construction i t is not necessary to consider the effect on columns of pattern loading. For the purpose of column design, all beams supported by a column at any one level may be assumed to be fully loaded. The nominal moments applied to the column by simple beams should be calculated from the eccentricities given in 4.7.6(a). Moments due to partial fixity in semi-rigiddesign should be added (see 2.1.2.4). In multi-storey columns which are effectively continuous at their splices, the net moment applied at any one level should be divided between the column lengths above and below that level in proportion to the stiffness, I I L , of each length, except that when the ratio of the stiffnesses does not exceed 1.5 the moment may be divided equally.
The nominal moments applied to the column (including any restraint moments from 2.1.2.4(b)) may be assumed to have no effect at the levels above and below the level at which they are applied. Whenonly nominal moments are applied, the column should satisfy the following relationship:
Tie panels may take the form of battens complying with 4.7.9; alternatively cross braced panels of equivalent rigidity may be used. In either case the tie panels should be designed to carry the loads for which the lacing system is designed.
where
F,
P ,
is the compressive force due to axial load: is the compressive strength; i s the gross cross-sectional area;
(g) The maximum slenderness, A,, of a main component (based on its minimum radius of gyration) between consecutive points where the lacing is attached should not exceed 50. The maximum slenderness of the strut a s a whole should not be taken as less than 1.4XC.
A,
(h) The effective length of a lacing should be taken a s the distance between the inner end welds or fasteners for single intersection lacing and as 0.7 times this distance for double intersection lacing connected by welds or fasteners at the intersection. The slenderness of a lacing should not exceed 180. (i) The lacings and their connections should be designed to carry the forces induced by a transverse shear a t any point in the length of the member equal to not less than 2.5 % of the maximum axial load in the member,divided equally amongst all transverse lacing systems in parallel planes. For members carrying bending stresses calculated from eccentricity of loading, applied end moments or lateral loading, the lacing should be proportioned to resist any shear due to bending in addition to the above mentioned value of not less than 2.5 %.
point in the length of a member equal to not less than 2.5 % of the maximum factored axial load in the member. For members carrying bending stresses calculated from eccentricity of loading, applied end moments or lateral loads, the battens should be proportioned to resist any shear due to bending in addition to the above mentioned value of not less than 2.5 %.
NOTE For battened angle members see 4.7.11 or 4.7.12 as
approprtate.
4.7.10 Angles, channels and T-section struts 4.7.10.1 General. For struts composed of angles, channels
and T-sections, the eccentricity of normal end connections may be ignored and the strut designed a an axially loaded s member provided that the conditions of 4.7.10.2 to 4.7.10.5 are met. Alternatively, in the internal bays of continuous struts, such as those forming the legs of towers or the compression flanges of lattice girders, the effective length may be determined from 4.7.2 and table 24. The length L should be taken a the distance between the s intersection of centroidal axes or the intersections of the setting out lines of the bolts, and r is the radius of gyration about the releuant axis. Axes are defined in table 28. lntermediate restraints may be allowed for in determining the relevant length L for buckling about each axis, provided they lie at an angle of not more than 45 O to the plane of buckling considered.
---I-*-uts. For a single angle connected lusser, or directly to another member, by:
4.7.9 Battened struts

A battened strut consisting of two or more main components may be designed as a single integral member, provided that the following conditions are met. (a) The main components are effectively restrained against buckling by a system of battens consisting of plates or sectiorls, so connected to the main components a to form with them an effectively rigid jointed frame. s (b) Battens are positioned opposite each other in each plane at the ends of the member and at points where it is laterally restrained. Intermediate battens should be
(C)T~~ slenderness, of a main component between end (based on its radius of welds or end fasteners of adjacent battens should not exceed 50. The slenderness of the battened strut, A,, about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the battens should be calculated from:
( a ) two or more fasteners in line along the angle at each end or by an equivalent welded connection, the slenderness X should be taken a the greatest of: s
1 0.85Lvv/rvv but 2 0.7Lvvlrvv+ 15; but 2 0.7Laalraa 30; + but 2 0.7Lbb/rbb + 30;
2 10 L a a / r a
(31 0.85Lbb/rbb
X = (A', ,
where
+ hC2)'/2
A, A ,
is the ratio L E / f of a whole member about that axis; isasdefined above.
(b) a single fastener at each end. the compression resistance should be taken a 80 % of the compression s resistance of an axially loaded member and the slenderness X should be $ken a the greatest of: s (11 l.OLvv/r (2) l.OLaa/r+
The maximum slenderness of the battened strut about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the battens should not be taken a less than 1.4Ac. s (d) The thickness of plate battens should be not less than 1/50 of the minimum distances between welds or fasteners. The slenderness of sections used as battens should not exceed 180. The width of an end batten along the axis of the main components should be not less than the distance between centroids of thd main members and not less than half this distance for intermediate battens. Further, the width of any batten should be not less than twice the width of the narrower main component. (el The battens and the connections between them and the main components should be designed to carry the forces and moments induced by a transverse shear at any
but but
2 0.7 LVv/r,, + 15;
but 2 0.7 Laa/raa 30; +
(3) l.OLbb/fbb
> 0.7Lbb/rbb + 30;
4.7.10.3 Double angle struts. For double angle struts interconnected back-to-back a recommended in 4.7.13 or s battened a recommended in 4.7.12 and connected a t each s end by one leg of each angle to a gusset, or directly to another member, as follows:
(a) to one side of a gusset or member at each end by two or more fasteners in line along each angle or by an equivs alent weld, the slenderness X should be taken a the greater of:
(11 l . O L x x / r x x but 2 0.7Lxx/rXx 30; +
(2)[ ( 0 . 8 5 ~ , ~ / r+~X c) ~% b u t 1.4Ac; ~ 2] >
BEST COPY AVAILABLE
(b) to one side of a gusset or member at each end by one fastener in each angle, the slenderness A should be taken a the greater of: s (11 l . O L x x / r x x but 2 0 . 7 L x x / r x x+ 30; (2) [ ( l . O ~ , , ~ / r ~ ~ ) ~ but 2 1.4Ac; + Ac2
( c ) to both sides of a gusset or member a t each end by two or more fasteners in line along the angles, the slenderness A should be taken as the greater o f :
4.7.1 1 Batten-starred angle struts

A battened strut of cruciform section may be designed as a single integral member provided that i t meets the cond~tions given in 4.7.9 except as follows. (a) Battens should be connected to the backs of angles parallel to both the rectangular axes of the member. They should alternate in each plane and the effective length of a main component should be taken as the spacing centre-to.centre of the battens in the same plane
1%
(1) 0.85Lxx/rxx (2) [ ( ~ ~ , , / r f~AC2]% ~ ~ *
but 2 0 . 7 L x x / r x x+ 30; but 2 1.4Ac;
(d) to both sides of a gusset or member at each end by a single fastener through each angle, the compression resistance should be taken as 80 % of the compression resistance of an axially loaded member and the slenderness A should be taken as the greater of: (1) l.OLxx/rxx (2) [(~,~/r,,)~ + k c 2 but 2 0.7Lxx/rxx + 30;
(b) The transverse shear of not less than 2.5 % of the factored axial load should be taken as acting perpendicular to the minor axis of the member. The battens in each plane should be designed for the components of this shear resolved perpendicular t o the rectangular axes plus any transverse shear due to the weight or wind resistance of the member.
1%
4.7.12 Battened parallel angle struts

A battened parallel angle strut composed of two similar angles arranged symmetrically with their corresponding rectangular axes aligned may be designed as a single integral member providing that in all other respects i t meets the conditions given in 4.7.9.
but 2 1.4~,;
In (a) to (d) A = Lvv/rvv , with L measured between inter, connecting fasteners for back-to-back struts or between end welds or end fasteners of adjacent battens for battened angle struts.
4.7.10.4 Single channel struts. For a single channel connected only by its web to a gusset, or directly to another member, by:
(a) two or more rows of fasteners arranged symmetrically across the web at each end, or an equivalent welded connection, the slenderness X should be taken as the greater of: (11 0.85Lxx/rxx; but 2 0.7Lyy/ryy + 30; (2) l.OL,v/rv, (b) two or more fasteners arranged symmetrically in a single row across the web at each end, or an equ~valent welded connection, the slenderness A should be taken as the greater o f : (11 1.OLxx/rxx; (2) 1. L/, O ,r but 2 0.7L,,/r,,
The eccentricity of end connections should be allowed for as recommended in 4.7.10.3.
4.7.1 3 Back-to-back struts 4.7.13.1 Components separated. A strut composed of two angles, channels or T-sections, separated back-to-back by a distance not exceeding that required for the end gusset connection, may be designed as a single integral member provided the following conditions are met.
(a) The main components should be of similar cross section with their corresponding rectangular axes aligned. (b) The main components should be interconnected by fasteners. Where the components are connected together by welding the member should be designed as a battened strut as given in 4.7.9. (c) The member should not be subjected to transverse loads perpendicular to the connected surfaces other than the w e w t or the wind resistance of the member. (d) The slenderness, A, of the compound strut about the $cis parallel to the connected surfaces should be calculated from 4.7.9(c) for battened struts. (e) The main components should be connected at intervals so that the member is divided into at least three bays of approximately equal length. A t the ends of the member the main components should be interconnected by not less than two fasteners along each line along the length of the member. (f) The interconnecting fasteners should be designed t o transmit the longitudinal shear between the main components induced by a transverse shear Q a t any point in the member; O should be taken as not less than 2.5 % of the factored axial compression in the member plus any load due to self weight or wind resistance of the member. In no case should the fasteners be less than 16 mm in diameter.
+ 30;
4.7.10.5 Single T-sectionstruts. For a single T-section connected only by its flange to a gusset, or directly to another member, by:
(a) two or more rows of fasteners arranged symmetrically across the flange at each end, or an equivalent welded connection. the slenderness A should be taken as the greater of:
(1) l . O L x x l r x x (2) 0.85L,,lr,,; (b) two or more fasteners arranged symmetrically in a single row across the flange a t each end, or an equivalent welded connection, the slenderness A should be taken as the greater of: (1) l . O L x x / f x x (2) 1.OLv,/rvv; but but 2 0 . 7 L x x l r x x+ 30;
> 0.7Lx,/rxx
t 30;
Connection
Sections and axes
Slenderness ratios (see not= 1 and 2 )
x x axis: 0.85Lxx/rxx
yy axis: 1 . O L y y l r Y y b u t 2 0 . 7 L , , l r y y
+ 30
~~
x x axis: 1 . O L x x l r x x
yy axis: l . O L y Y / r Y y but
> 0.7Lyy/rYy
+ 30
xx axis: l . O L x x l r x x but 2 0 . 7 L x x l r x x
yy axis:0.85L Yy/ryy
+ 30
x x axis: l . O L x x l r x x but
yy axis: l.OLyy/ry,
> 0.7Lxxlrx,
+ 30
- -
NOTE 1. The length L is taken between the intersectlons of the centroidal axes or the intersectlons of the setting out lines of the bolts, irrespective o f whether the strut is connected t o a gusset or directly t o another member.
NOTE 2. Intermediate lateral restraints reduce the value of L for buckling about the relevant axes. For single angle members, L , restraints perpendicular t o either aa or bb.
is taken between lateral
or NOTE 3. For s~ngle double angles connected b y one bolt, the compression resistance is also reduced t o 80 % o f that for an axially loaded member, see 4.7.10.2(b) and 4.7.10.3(dj. NOTE 4. Oouble angles are either bartened (see 4.7.121 or interconnected back-to-back (See 4.7.13). Battens or interconnecting fasteners are also needed at the ends of members. NOTE 5. = Lvvlrvv w l t h L v v measured between ~nrerconnecting fasteners for back-to.back struts or between end welds or end fasteners of adlacent battens for battened angle struts.
&
BS 5950 : Part 1 : Section four
1990
The longitudinal shear per interconnection should be taken as 0.25QXc,where A, i s the slenderness of the main component centre-to-centreof interconnections. (g) At all interconnections the fasteners should pass through solid steel packings, washers or gussets. In struts at least two fasteners should be provided in line across the width of all members that are sufficiently wide to accommodate them. 4.7.13.2 Components in contact. A strut composed of two angles, channels or T-sections in contact back-to-back or separated by continuous steel packing may be designed as a single integral member providing that the following conditions are met. (a) The main components should be similar sections arranged symmetrically with their corresponding rectangular axes aligned.
Moments in angle, channel and T-section members due to eccentricity of connections may be treated as recommended in 4.6.3 for tension members or 4.7.10 for struts. 4.8.2 Tension members with moments Tension members with moments should be checked for resistance to lateral-torsional buckling in accordance with 4.3 under moment alone. They should also be checked for capacity under the combined effects of axial load and moment a t the points of greatest bending moments and axial loads, usually at the ends. The following relationship should be satisfied:
where
F
A,
p,
is the applied axial load in member;

i s the effective area (see 3.3.3);
(b) Interconnection should be as follows. (1) When interconnection i s by means of fasteners at least two fasteners should be provided in line across the width of the member providing it is sufficiently wide. The spacing of the fasteners should not exceed 300 mm or 32t where r is the thickness of the thinner part joined. (2) When interconnection is by means of welds both pairs of edges of the main components should be welded. The spacing centre-to-centre of interconnections should be taken as the spacing centre-to-centre of consecutive effective lengths of weld on the same edge. The space between consecutive welds on the same edge should not exceed 300 mm or 16r where t is the minimum thickness of the parts joined.
(c) The member should not be subject to transverse load perpendicular to the connected surfaces other than the weight or wind resistance of the member.
is the design strength; is the applied moment about the major axis at critical region;
M,
M,, i s the moment capacity about the major axis In the absence of axial load (see 4.2.5 and 4.2.6); M, is the applied moment about the minor axls at critical region; M,, i s the moment capacity about the minor axis in the absence of axial load (see 4.2.5 and 4.2.6).
Alternatively for greater economy in plastic or compact cross sections only the following relationship should be satisfied.
where
(d) The slenderness, A, of the compound strut about the axis parallel to the connected surfaces should be calculated from 4.7.9(c). (e) The main components should be connected at intervals so that the member i s divided into at least three bays of approximately equal length. A t the ends of the member the main components should be interconnected by not less than two fasteners in each line along the length of the member, or by equivalent welds. (f) The interconnecting welds or fasteners should be designed to transmit the longitudinal shear between the components as given in 4.7.13.1 (f). (g) In members exposed to the weather or other corrosive influences the components should be connected by continuous welds, or fasteners as laid down in 6.2.4.
M,, i s the reduced moment capacity about the major axis in the presence of axial load obtained from published tables;
Mrv is the reduced moment capacity about the minor axis in the pr ence of axial load obtained from published t a es;
8'
I,
is a constaqt taken as:
2.0 for I arid H sections; 2.0 for solid and hollow circular sections; 513 for solid and hollow rectangular sections; 1.0 for all other cases.
z2
is a constant taken as:
1.0 for 2.0 for 513 for 1.0 for
I and H sections; solid and hollow circular sections; solid and hollow rectangular sections; all other cases.
4.8 Axially loaded members with moments

4.8.1 General Members should comply with 4.2 to 4.7 inclusive, covering the treatment of members subject to moments and axial loads applied separately. in addition to the recommendations given in 4.8.2 and 4.8.3.
4.8.3 Compression members with moments 4.8.3.1 General. Compression members should be checked for local capacity at the points of greatest bending moment and axial load (usually at the ends). This capacity may be limited either by yielding or local buckling depending on the section properties. The member should also be checked
for overall buckling by either the simplified or more exact approach.
where
4.8.3.2 Localcapacity check. The appropriate relationship

given below should be satisfied. (a) For semi-compact and slender cross sections (and a s an alternative simplified approach for plastic or compact cross sections):
Mcxi s the moment capacity about the major axis obtained from 4.2.5 or 4.2.6; MCvis the moment capacity about the minor axis obtained from 4.2.5 or 4.2.6 but not subject to the restriction Mc 1.2p,Z;
<
F M -+.+Y<1 A,Pv Mcx
M Mcy
PC, is the compression resistance about the major axis; PC, i s the compression resistance about the minor axis.
NOTE. I n cases where M, or My approaches zero the more exact approach may be more conservative than the simplified approach. I n such situations the values satisfying the simplified approach may be used.
NOTE. For slender cross sectlons a reduced effective value of p y

should b e used in accordance w ~ t h 3.6.
(b) For plastic and compact cross sections:
where for (a) and (b) A g is the gross cross-sectionalarea and other notations are as given in 4.8.2.
4.9 Members with biaxial moments

Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile and compressive axial forces may be designed in accordance with the rules given in 4.8.3, with the value of F taken as zero.
4.8.3.3 Overall buckling check 4.8.3.3.1 Simplified approach. The following relationship
should be satisfied:
where . .
4.10 Empirical design rules for members in lattice frames and trusses
is the applied axial load in the member; This clause i s applicable to the design of lattice frames and trusses except where fatigue is a design consideration. Generally it may be assumed that secondary stresses will be insignificant if the slenderness of the chord members in the plane of the truss i s greater than 50 and that of most of the web members i s greater than 100. The following assumptions may be made. (a) For the purpose of calculating the forces in the member the connections are pinned. (b) For the purpose of calculating the effective length of members the fixity of the connections and the rigidity of ad,acent membersmay be taken into account. (c) Where the exact position of point loads relative to the connection of the rafter to the web members i s not known%e local bending moment may be taken as equal to:
F
A,
m
pC i s the compressive strength;
i s the gross cross-sectional area;

is the equivalent uniform moment factor obtained from table 18;
M, is the buckling resistance moment capacity (about major axis) (see 4.3.7);
Z ,
is the elastic section modulus about the minor axis;
pY i s the design strength.
4.8.3.3.2 More exact approach. The following relationship

should be satisfied.
mM,
mM + 2 9 1
May
Ma where
M a , i s the maximum buckling moment about the major axis in the presence of axial load, taken to be the lesser of:
(1
-
bIf% 6'
-\
(d) Ties to chords should be properly connected to an adequate restraint system. (el The length of chord members may be taken as the distance between connection to the web members in plane and the distance between longitudinal ties or purlins out of plane. ( f ) Purlins in light frames and trusses need not be checked for compressive stresses originating from their function as restraints. (g) Where the sheeting spans from truss to truss in the absence of purlins the stability of the rafter should be considered and the sheeting should be adequately fixed. This method of providing restraint to the rafter should only be used where the loading is mainly roof loading.
M,
(1 -
k)
' C , '
governing lateral/torsional buckling;
Ma, i s the maximum buckling moment about the minor axis in the presence of axial load taken as: F (1- 7)
4.11 Additional provisionsfor gantry girders

4.1 1.1 General lnaddition to thegeneral rules for beams given in 4.2 to 4.5 gantry girders should fulfil the conditions given in 4.1 1.2 to 4.1 1.6. Gantry girders should be designed to resist factored loading a given in 2.2.3 and 2.4.1. s 4.1 1.2 Crabbing of trolley Gantry girders intended to carry cranes of loading class Ql and Q2 as defined in BS 2573 : Part 1 need not be designed for the effects of crabbing action.
Gantry girders intended carry cranes of class and O4 Q3 a defined in BS 2573 : Part 1 should be designed for the s following couple due to crabbing action. This couple need not be combined with the horizontal loads obtained from 2.2.3. The couple is due to the crabbing action of two wheels or bogies comprising two equal and opposite forces, F R ,acting transverse to the rail, one a t each end of the wheel base.
I,
is the second moment of area of the crane rail about its horizontal centroidal axis: (a) when the crane rail is mounted directly on the beam flange K R = 3.25; (b) where a suitable resilient pad not less than 5 mm thick is interposed between the crane rail and the beam flange K R = 4.0.
K R is a constant taken as:
The stress obtained by dispersing the load over t h ~ s length should not be greater than p,,
4.1 Welded girders
Welds should be continuous throughout. Top flange welds should preferably be full penetration butt welds and should be checked for the effects of local compression, see 4.11.5, in addition to ail other effects.~t be that this force is wholly transmitted by the welds to the web.
4.12 Purlins and side rails

4.12.1 General Purlins and side rails may be designed on the assumption that the cladding provides lateral restraint to an angle section, or to the face against which it is connected in the case of other sections. In both cases, the type of cladding and i t s fixings should be such that it is capable of acting in this manner. 4.12.2 Deflections The deflections of purlins and side rails should be limited to suit the characteristics of the particular cladding system. 4.12.3 Wind loading Wind loading should be determined in accordance with C 3 : Chapter V : Part 2. The effects of local pressures P need not be considered in the design of the purlins and s~de rails. 4.12.4 Empirical design of purlins and side rails C 4.12.4.1 General. As an alternative to other methods of design, purlins and side rails fabricated from hot rolled angles or hollow hctions may be designed in accordance with empirical rules given in 4.12.4.3 or 4.12.4.4. Purl~ns and side rails fabricated from cold formed sections should be designed in accordance with BS 5950 : Part 5. 4.1 2.4.2 General rules for empirical design (a) The members should be of steel to a minimum of design grade 43 (b) Unfactored loads should be considered for empirical design, i.e. effectively -yf = 1 .O. (c) The span of the members should not exceed 6.5 m centre.to-centre of main supports. (d) Where the members generally span only one bay each member should be connected by at least two fasteners at each end.
(e) Where the members are generally continuous over two or more bays, with staggered joints in adjacent lines
FR = where
w W w -but 2 w 40aw 20
LC
LC is the span of the crane;

W is the factored maximum load on a wheel or bogie , pivot;
is the distance the centres of the end wheelsOr between the pivots Of the bogies (where horizontal guide rails are used a i s the wheelbase of , the guide rails).
4.1 1.3 Lateral torsional buckling No account should be taken of the effect of moment gradient, i.e. n and m should be taken as 1.0 (see 4.3) 4.1 1.4 Shear buckling The shear buckling resistance should be calculated without using tension field action (see 4.4.5.3). 4.1 1.5 Local compression under wheels Local compression on the web may be obtained by distributing the crane wheel load over a length x , where:
X,
= 2 ( H R+
T)
where
H R i s the rail height; T i s the flange thickness.

Alternatively where the properties of the rail are known: x R = KR where
' R Y
cf: -
t
1,
is the web thickness; is the second moment of area of the flange about ~ t s horizontal centroidal axis;
of members, at least one end of any single bay members should be connected by not less than two fasteners.
4.1 2.4.3 Specific rules for the empirical design of purlins

(a) Slope. The slope of the roof should not exceed 30 O .
(b) Loading (1) The loading on the purlin should be substantially uniformly distributed. Not greater than 10 % of the total roof load on the member should be due to other types of load.
(d) Dimensions. The dimension D of the member perpendicular to the plane of the cladding and the dimension B parallel to the plane of the cladding should be not less than the values given in table 30, except that when Z, is greater than the minimum value from table 30, the minimum value of D may be reduced in the same proportion. However, in no case should D be less than B.
(2) Imposed load should be determined as recommended in 2.2, but should not be taken as less than 0.75 k ~ l m ' .
(c) Elastic modulus. The elastic modulus, Z, of a purlin about i t s axis parallel to the plane of the cladding should be not less than the values given in table 29. (d) Dimensions. The dimension D of the member perpendicular to the plane of the cladding, and, where applicable, the dimension B parallel to the plane of the cladding should be not less than the values given in table 29. Tabla 29. Empirical values for purlins
.----
Purlin section
Z lmin.)
cm3
mm
L I45
mm
L I60
L
of the cladding respectively (in kN). is the span of the rail (in mm), taken as: (a) for 2, and 0 : the span centre-to-centre of maln
Angle
W,L
1800
WPL
CHS
2000
WPL 1800
L I65
Ib) for 2, and 8: the span centre-to-centre of main supports O R where properly supported sag rods are provided, the spacing of the sag rods.
RHS
Ll70
Ll150
4.13 Column bases

4.13.1 General
Column bases should be of sufficient size, stiffness and strength to transmit the axial load, bending moments and shear for- in columns to their foundations or other support without exceeding the load carrying capacity of such supports. The nominal bearing pressure between the baseplate and the support may be determined on the basis of a linear distribution of pressure. For concrete foundations the bearing strength may be taken as 0.4fcuwhere f,, is the characteristic concrete cube strength a t 28 days. Baseplates may be designed either by the empirical method given in 4.13.2 or by other rational means. The connection of the column to the baseplate should comply with 4.13.3. Baseplates of design grade 43Asteel subject to compression only should not be limited in thickness by the brittle fracture requirements. Baseplates of design grade 43A steelnoments transmitting moments ib the foundation should not exceed i s given to brittle fracture. 50 mm unless special
Wp is the total unfactored load on one span of the purlin

(in k N ) due to either (dead whichever is the greeter.
+ imposed) or
(wind
- dead)
is the length-centre-to-centre of main (vert~cal) supports. but where properly supported sag rods are provided, may be taken as the sag rod spacing for the dererminarron o f B onlv (in m m ) .
4.1 2.4.4 Specific rules for empirical design of side rails (a) Slope. The slope of the cladding should not exceed 15 O from the vertical.
(b) Loading. Side rails should not generally be subjected to loads other than wind load and the self weight of the cladding. Not more than 10 % of the total load on the member about the axis under consideration should be due to loading from other sources or due to loads which are not uniformly distributed. Notwithstanding the above, side rails may be used to provide restraint to their supporting members.
(c) Section moduli. The elastic section moduli,Z, and Z?, of the side rail about its axes parallel to and perpendicular to the plane of the cladding respectively should be not less than the values given In table 30.
4.73.2 Empirical design of baseplates 4.13.2.1 Oversized baseplates. When the size of a baseplate
is more than the minimum required, any portion of its area may be taken as ineffective, provided that the bearing pressure calculated on the remaining effective area does not exceed the bearing strength.
4.13.3 Connection of baseplates

Provided that the contact areas on the baseplate and the end of thecolumn (including, in stiffened bases, the contact surfaces on the stiffeners) are in tight bearing contact, compression may be transmitted to the baseplate in direct bearing. Welds or fasteners should be provided to transmit any shear or tension developed at the connection due to all realistic combinations of factored loads (see 2.2.1 ). Where the contact surfaces are not suitable to transmit compression in direct bearing, welds or fasteners should be provided to transmit all forces and moments.
4.13.22 Concentric forces. If a rectangular plate i s loaded concentrically by ! H, channel. box or RHS, its minimum , thickness should be:.
but not less than the flange thickness of the column supported, where: a i s the greater projection of the plate beyond the column: is the lesser projection of the plate beyond the column;
4.14 Cased sections

4.14.1 General
As an alternative to the method given in BS 5950 : Section
b
w
3.2", a section encased in concrete may be designed by the

empirical method presented in 4.14.2,4.14.3 or 4.14.4 as appropriate,provided that it meets the following conditions. (a) The steel section i s either a single rolled or fabricated Ior H.section with equal flanges or two similar rolled channel sections in contact back-to-back or separated hack.to-back by not less than 20 mm nor more than half their depth; double channel sections should meet the conditions of 4.7.13.2 if in contact, otherwise they should be laced or battened to meet the conditions of 4.7.8 or 4.7.9 respectively. (b) The overall dimensions of the steel section does not exceed 1000 mm x 500 mm, the dimension of 1000 mm being measured parallel to the web or webs.
( c ) Primary structural connections to the member should preferably be made directly to the steel section. In such cases the eccentricity given in 4.7.6(a) should be taken from the face of the steel section.
i s the pressure on the underside of the plate assuming a uniform distribution;
p v p i s the design strength of the plate (from 3.1.1 or table 6) but not greater than 270 ~ / m m ' . If gussets are used for transmitting forces to the baseplate, the projecting distances, a and b, are measured from the extremities of the gussets, provided that the gussets are designed for the resulting forces (see 4.13.2.4). For solid round or hollow columns, where loading on the cap or under the base i s uniformly distributed over the whole area including the column shaft, the minimum thickness (in mm) of a square or circular cap or baseplate should be:
where
( d l The steel section i s unpainted and free from oil, grease. dirt, or loose rust and millscale. (e) The steel section i s solidly encased in ordinary dense structural concrete of at least grade 20 to BS 81 10. ( 1 ) There is a mi um rectangle of solid casing, which may be chamfere at the corners and provides a cover to the outer face and edges of the steel of not less than . ' 50 mm.
0, i s the length of the side or diameter of cap or baseplate, not less than 1.540 + 75) mm;
D i s the diameter of the column.
4.13.2.3 Eccentric forcesand non-rectangularplates. If the bearing pressure beneath a baseplate is not uniform, or if the baseplate i s not rectangular, calculations should be
carried out to determine the bending moments in the baseplate. The maximum moment should not exceed 1.2p,,Z ( p , , 270 ~ / m mwhereZis the elastic modulus ~ ) of the baseplate.
<
4.13.2.4 Gussets. In a stiffened base, the moment in a

gusset due to the bear~ng pressure on the effective area used in the design of the baseplate should not exceed p v g Z where
(g) The concrete casing extends the full length of the member and connections. Concrete i s thoroughly compacted especially in areas under cleats, cap plates and beam soffits. Sufficient clearance is provided at all points so that the concrete can be efficiently worked around the steel elements. (h) The casing i s reinforced using steel fabric complying with BS 4483, reference 0 9 8 . Alternatively. steel reinforcement or wire of not less than 5 m m diameter or their equivalent, complying with BS 4449 or BS 4482 may be used at a maximum spacing of 200 mm to form a cage of closed links and longitudinal bars.
is the elastic modulus of the gusset;
P,, is the design strength of the gusset
< 270 ~
/ m m ~
When the effective area of the baseplate i s less than its gross area, the connections of the gussets should be checked for the effects of a nominal distribution of bearing pressure on the gross area as well as for the effects of the distr~bution used in the design of the baseplate.
' In preparation.
The reinforcement is so arranged as to pass through the centre of the concrete cover of the flanges; the minimum lap of the reinforcement, and the details of the links, should comply with BS 81 10. (i)The effective length, L E , of the cased section is limited to 40bc, 1 0 0 b ~ / d ,or 250r whichever is least, where b ,
IS the minimum width of solid casing within the deoth of the steel section; ~,
~
PC, = (A, + 0.25 - A,

P where A,
) P,
is the gross sectional area of the concrete, but neglecting any casing in excess of 75 mm from the overall dimensions of the steel section and neglecting any applied finish:
i s the gross sectional area of the steel strut;
A,
d, i s the minimum depth of solid casing within the

width of the steel section:
r
f,, is the characteristic concrete cube strength at 28 days of the encasement but < 40 ~ / m m ' ;
p ,
is the minimum radius of gyration of the steel section alone.
is the compressive strength of the steel section , determined a given in 4.7.5 using r and r, as s defined in (a) and takingp, 355 ~ I m m ' ;
<
4.14.2 Cased members subject to bending

Cased beams which meet the conditions given in 4.14.1 should be designed as for an uncased section (see 4.2 and 4.3) except that the radius of gyration, r,, may be taken as 0 . 2 B + 100) mm or r,. of the uncased section whichever i s greater. All other properties should be taken as for the uncased section. The buckling resistance moment. M should not exceed 1% times that permitted for the , uncased section, where B is the width of the flange. In the calculation of deflections, the effective moment of inertia of the cased section may be taken to be that of the steel section plus the transformed net area of the concrete, i.e.: I,, where I,, Is 1,
i s the second moment of area of cased section:
= Is
p ,
is the design strength of the steel < 355 N/mmz
4.14.4 Cased members subject to axial load and moment
A cased section meeting the conditions given In 4.14.1 and moment subject tocombined axial compression and bend~ng should satisfy the following relationships.
(a) For capacity:
F, M M - - + X + Y < l pa MCK M c y
(b) For buckling resistance:
Fc mM mM, < , -+x+-
Pc
where F,
M b
Mcv
1,
Is
i s the compressive force due to axial load;
ue
PC is the compression resistance (see 4.14.3); PC, is the short strut capacity (i.e. the compression resistance of a cased strut of zero slenderness):
M, M, m M ,
,
i s the second moment of area of steel section.
i s the second moment of area of gross concrete section; a, is the modular ratio. 4.14.3 Cased struts
Cased struts which meet the conditions given in 4.14.1 may be designed on the following basis. (a) The radius of gyration, r v , of the member about its axis in the plane of its web or webs should be taken a O.Zb,, but not more than 0.2(B + 150) mm where b, s is the minimum width of solid casing within the depth of the steel section and B is the overall width of the steel flange or flanges. Where the radius of gyration of the steel section alone is greater than that o f the composite section, the radius of gyration of the steel section alone may be used. The radius of gyration, r,, of the member about its axis parallel to the planes of the flanges should be taken a s that of the steel section alone. (b) The compression resistance. P C , of the cased section should be determined from:
p , but not greater than
is the a. ~ ~ l i moment about the major axis; ed . i s the applled moment about the mlnor axis; i s the equjvalent uniform moment factor obtained from table 18:
M q ,, s
. the minor axis moment capaclty of the steel

section (see 4.2.5 or 4.2.6);
is the major axis moment capacity of the steel section (see 4.2.5 or 4.2.6);
&
i s the buckling resistance moment obtained from 4.3.7.3 using section properties as given in 4.14.2.
4.15 Web openings

4.15.1 General
Except as prov~ded in 3.3 for holes for fasteners. for the effects of openings should be considered in the design. At all points where the applied shear or moment at the net section exceeds the capacity of the member adequate reinforcement should be provided. Members should comply with 4.2 to 4.4 as appropriate they should comply with 4.15.2 and 4.5. In addit~on or 4.1 5.3 as appropriate.
the short strut capacity given by:
4.1 5.2 Sections other than castellated 4.15.2.1 General. Where holes occur which will affect the
strength of the member, consideration should be given to the clauses which apply to castellated beams.
4.15.3 Castellated beams 4.1 5.3.1 Types The following rules apply to a castellated beam of dimensions a shown in figure 9 and care should be s
exercised when applying them to sections of different dimensions.
4.15.2.2 Unreinforced circular openings Unreinforced

circular openings may be located in the webs of compact beams and girders withoutconsidering net section properties provided that:
(a) the load on the member is substantially uniformly distributed and point loads should not be situated within a distance equal t o the depth of the member from the centre line of the hole nor should they generate a shear in the web greater than 10 % of the shear resistance of the section;
4.15.3.2 Moment capacity. The moment capacity of the

section should be calculated from the net section properties (see 3.3) with due allowance for the secondary vierendeel effects of shear at the openings and the local effects of point loads if any, at any point in the length of the beam.
4.15.3.3 Shear stress. The shear stress across the net

section of the web, and between openings should be calculated using elastic distribution and the maximum shear stress should not exceed 0 . 7 ~ ~ .
(b) the section has an axis of symmetry in the plane of bending; (c) the openings are located within the middle third of thedepth and the middle half of the span of the member; (d) the spacing between the centres of any two adjacent openings measured parallel to the axis of the member is a minimum of 2.5 times the diameter of the larger opening; (e) the factored maximum shear a t the support does not exceed 50 % of the shear resistance of the section. When the dimensions and position of openings are not in accordance with (a) to (el, consideration should be given to the net section properties and design should be in accordance with 4.15.3.
4.1 5.3.4 Incomplete lateral restraint. Beams with

incomplete lateral restraint should be designed in accordance with 4.3 except that the equivalent slenderness, hLT, should be calculated using the section properties applicable to a cross section through the centreline of the opening.
4.15.3.5 Local buckling. The constituent parts of the

section should be checked for local buckling in accordance with 3.5.
4.15.3.6 Deflection. The secondary deflections occurring

a t openings should be added to the principal deflections of the section.
4.15.2.3 Reinforced openings. Web reinforcement should

be provided adjacent to the openings to equal the crosssectional area of the web removed. The reinforcement should be carried past the opening for such a distance that the local shear stress, due to load being transferred from the reinforcement t o the web, does not exceed 0 . 6 ~ ~ .
4.15.3.7 Supports and concentrated loads At points of support and concentrated load the effects of bearing and buckling should be considered i n accordance with 4.5.
Openings except for fasteners should be filled and stiffeners provided a necessary. s
1
D
IS the
serlal deqth of the original beam.
Figure 9. Dimensions o f castellated sections
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section five
Section five. Continuous construction
5.1 General
5.1.1 Scope
Section five applies to structures or elements of structures which are connected by rigid joints (see 6.1.4) or are continuous over supports. Rules are given for both elastic and plastic methods of design. In addition to the limitations for sway stability given in this section i t i s recommended that the deflection limits given in 2.5.1 are not exceeded. 5.1.2 Loading 5.1.2.1 Verrical load. Vertical loads should be arranged in the most unfavourable but realistic pattern for each factors need not be varied when element. Dead load considering such pattern loading, but should be varied when considering stability against overturning.
Sway stiffness may be provided by: (a) an effective bracing system; (b) the bending stiffness of the frame members; (c) the provision of l i f t shafts, shear walls, etc.
A rigid jointed multi-storey frame may be considered as a

non-sway frame if in every individual storey the deflection.
6 , in storey height, h, due to the notional horizontal

loading given in 5.1.2.3 satisfies the following crlter~a. (1) For clad fram'es where the stiffening effect of the cladding i s not taken into account in the deflection calculations:
6<-
h 2000
(2) For unclad frames or clad frames where the stiffening effect of the cladding i s taken into account in the deflection calculations:
5.1.2.2 Horizontal loads. For load cases involving

horizontal loads, pattern loading of vertical loads need not be considered.
5.1.2.3 Notional horizontal loads. To check the sway

stability of the structure notional horizontal forces should be applied. These notional forces may arise from practical imperfections such as lack of verticality and should be taken as: 0.5 % of the factored dead plus vertical imposed load applied horizontally. These notional forces should be assumed to act in any one direction at a time and should be applied at each roof and floor level or their equivalent. The notional forces should not:
A rigid jointed multi-storey frame which does not comply with the above criteria should be classed as a sway frame, even if i t is also braced.
5.2 Elastic design

Elastic analysis should be carried out under factored loads.
5.3 Plastic design

5.3.1 General Plastic design may be utilized in the design of structures or elements of structures provided that the conditions in 5.3.2 to 5.3.7 are met.
(a) be applied when considering overturning; (b) be combined wcth the applied horizontal loads; (c) be combined with temperature effects;
( d l be taken to contribute to the net reactions at the foundations.
5.3.2 Type of loading

Plastic design may be used where loading i s predominantly static and, therefore, fatigue i s not a design criterion.
5.1.2.4 Base stiffness. I n the analysis of all frames the

same base stiffness about the axis under consideration should be used for all calculations. In the absence of detailed knowledge of the foundation stiffness the following should be assumed. (a) Where the column is rigidly connected to a suitable foundation the stiffness of the base should be taken as equal to the stiffness of the column, except as in 5.7.3.1. (b) Where the column is nominally connected to the foundation a base stiffness of 10 % of the column stiffness may be assumed. (c) Where an actual pin or rocker i s provided the base stiffness should be taken as zero.
5.3.3 Grades of steel

Steel forplastic design should comply with all three of the following:' (a) the stress strain diagram has a plateau at the yield stress extending for at least six times the yield strain; (b) the ratio of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength to the specified minimum yield strength is not less than 1.2;
ii
(c) the elongation (on a gauge length of 5.6h/s,) is not less than 15 %, where So i s a glven in BS EN 10002:l s
5.3.4 Geometrical properties Where plastic hinges occur in a member the proportions of its cross section should not exceed the lcm~ting values for plastic design given in table 7. The cross section should be symmetrical about its axis perpendicular to the axis of the hinge rotation.
5.1.3 Classification of multi-storey frames as sway or

non-sway
/. 1
A \
A multi.storey may be classed as non.sway (whether frame or not i t is braced) i f its sway is such that secondary momentsdue to non.vert,cality of columns can be
The cross section of members not containing plastic hinges should be compact unless under an elastic analysis of the frame they satisfy the recommendationsof section four. 5.3.5 Restraints Torsional restraint should be provided at a plastic hinge location if practicable (except a in 5.5.3.1). Where s impracticable the restraint should be provided within a distance of D/2 of the plastic hinge location along the member. Within a member containing a plastic hinge the maximum distance L, from the hinge restraint to an adjacent restraint should be calculated by one of the following methods. (a) Conservatively L, (in mm) may be taken as:
5.3.7 Fabrication restrictions Within a length equal to the member depth either side of a plastic hinge location the following restrictions should be applied to the tension flange and noted in the design documents. (a) Holes should be drilled or else punched 2 mm undersize and reamed. (b) All sheared or hand flame cut edges-shouldbe finished smooth by grinding, chipping or planing. These restrictions should also be applied where local yield lines are assumed in the design of rigid connections, (see 6.1.4) and where repetition of loading makes fatigue a design criterion (see 6.1.6).
5.4 Continuous beams

5.4.1 Elastic design where
f, is the average compressive stress due to axial load (in ~ / m m * ) ;
When an elastic analysis is used the capacity and buckling resistance of the section should be calculated from section four. For a compact section the elastic moment diagram for each span may be modified by up to 10 % of the peak elastic moment provided that the moments and shear remain in equilibrium with the factored loads. 5.4.2 Plastic design Plastic analysis may be used provided the conditions of 5.3 are met.
p , is the design strength (in ~ I m m ' ) ;

r, is the radius of gyration about the minor axis (in mm);
x
is the torsional index.
Where the member has unequal flanges r, should be taken a the lesser of the values for the compression s flange only or the whole section. Where the cross section of the member varies within the length L, the minimum value of r , and the maximum value of x should be used. (b) The method given in appendix G taking account of restraint to the tension flange, or the conservative method in 5.5.3.5 may be used with the ratio of the depth of haunch to the depth of rafter = 1. The spacing of restraints to member lengths not containing a plastic hinge should be such a to satisfy the recommendas tions of section four. Where the restraints are placed at the limiting distance L, no further checks on restraint spacings are required. 5.3.6 Stiffeners at hinge locations Web stiffeners should be provided where a load is applied within Dl2 of a plastic hinge location which exceeds 10 % of the shear capacity of the member (see 4.2.3). The stiffener should be provided within a distance of half the depth of the member either side of the hinge location and be designed to carry the applied load in accordance with 4.5.4 and 4.5.5. If the stiffeners are flat plates the outstand to thickness ratio, b,/t,, should not exceed 9. Where sections are used the ratib:
5.5 Portal frames

5.5.1 General In the elastic or plastic design of portal frames attention should be paid to thedeflection of the frame at serviceability loading. 5.5.2 Elastic design When an elastic analysis is used the recommendations of 5.4.1 should be applied. The stability of the frame should be checked i6ccordance with 2.4.2, and the stability of individual components checked in accordance with section four q appendix G. -. 5.5.3 Plastic desigil 5.5.3.1 General. Plastic analysis may be used provided the conditions of 5.3 are met. The conditions of 5.3.5 need not be met at the last hinge to form provided it can be clearly identified. 5.5.3.2 Sway stability. In the absence of a rigorous analys~s of frame stability the following condition should be satisfied. The horizontal deflection, 6, calculated by linear elastic analysis at the top of any column due to the notional horizontal loading given in 5.1.2.3 applied in the same direction at the top of each column should not exceed h11000, where h is the height of the column. In calculat~ng 6 allowance may be made for the restraining effect of cladding.
( ! $
where
.I
should not exceed 9
I i s the second moment of area of the stiffener about , the face of the element;
ic tho tnrsion constant of the stiffener.
Irrespective of the effects of cladding this condition may be satisfied provided that in each bay:
h
I,
is the column height; is the minimum second moment of area of the column for bending in the plane of the frame (taken as zero if the column is not rigidly connected to the rafter); is the minimum second moment of area of the rafters for bending in the plane of the frame; is the design strength of the rafters;
Lb
44L
in which L is the effective span of the bay. When the , depth of the haunches (as shown in figure 10) is not less than 2 0 then: L, = L - L,
I,
p ,
otherwise, L,, should be taken as equal to L where

p
=
L , is the total developed length of the rafter;
R is the arching ratio W r / W o ;

Wr is the factored vertical load on the rafters;
(2)($)
() 7($1
for a single bay frame;
Wo is the maximum value of Wr which could cause

plastic failure of the rafter treated as a fixed ended beam of span L.
for a multi-bay frame;
5.5.3.3 Snap-through stability of rafter. In each internal

bay of a multi-bay frame (i.e. greater than two bays) snap-through instability may occur due to spread of columns and inversion of the rafter.
I
I
L,, L
is the haunch length. If the haunches at each side of the bay are different, the mean value should be taken. is the span of the bay;
0 is the minimum depth of the rafters;
Depth o f haunch
Depth o f haunch
Oepth o f
haunch
+ Restra~nt $
X Restra~nt
L
or v~rtual restraint (see second paragraw o f 5.5.3.5.21
Figure 10. Haunch restraints
To prevent this the rafter slenderness should be such that:
Depth of haunchldepth of rafter = 1: K I = 620, K 2 = 645 = 2: K I = 495, K2 = 515 = 3: K, = 445, K 2 = 465 (b) Where conditions (1) to (3) of alternative (a) are not met or if the spacing of the compression flange restraints exceeds the conservative value of L, given by alternative (a), then reference should be made to appendix G. Provided that the purlins and their connections to the rafter are capable of providing torsional restraint to the top flange of the rafter, a virtual lateral restraint to the bottom flange may be assumed a t the point of contraflexure. Such torsional restraint may be assumed when conditions ( 1 ) and (2) in (a) above are satisfied and in addition: (i) every length of purlin has at least two bolts in each purlin-to-rafter connection; (ii) the depth of the purlin section i s not less than 0.25 times the depth of the rafter.
where
8, for the symmetrical ridged frame is the rafter slope;

for any other roof shape:
where
h , is the height of the apex above the top of the columns.

No limit need be placed on LID when 52 d 1
5.5.3.4 Column stability. At or adjacent to plastic hinge locations the conditions of 5.3.5 should be met. In addition
the stability of the column between restraints to the compression flange where plastic hinges do not occur should satisfy the recommendations of section four. Alternatively restraint to the tension flange may be taken into account by satisfying the recommendations of appendix G.
5.5.3.5 Rafter stability. 5.5.3.5.1 The spacing of restraints to the compression

flange asshown in figure 10should be limited to L,obtained from 5.5.3.5.2 or 5.5.3.5.3 a appropriate. s NOTE. In figure 10 the restraints to the bottom flange extend a t least UP to the point of contraflexure.The number of such restraints i s governed by the limiting spacing L. ,
5.5.3.5.3 If the tension flange is not restrained as described in 5.5.3.5.2, then the limiting spacing L, for compression flange restraints should be such a to satisfy the recommends. s tions given in 5.3.5 adjacent to a plastic hinge location, or those given in 4.8.3.3.1 elsewhere.
For this restraint condition, an effective lateral restraint to the bottom flange should not be assumed a t the point of contraflexure, unless one is specifically provided at that ~oint.
5.5.3.5.2 Where the tension flange i s restrained at intervals such that the recommendations given in 4.8.3.3.1 (or 5.3.5
adjacent to a plastic hinge location) are satisfied when checked using an effective length L E equal to the spacing of the tension flange restraints, then the limiting spacing L s for compression flange restraints may be obtained from (a) or (b) as follows. (a) Provided that: (1) the rafter is a UB section; (2) the depth of the haunch is not greater than three times the depth of the rafter; (3) the haunch flange is not smaller than the rafter flange; then L , may conservatively be taken as: K l r,x for design'grade 43 steel
5.6 Multi-storey rigid frames: elastic design

5.6.1 General
When an elastic analysis is used the conditions of 5.1 and 5.2 should be met. In elastic design the forces and moments in the members under vertical loading may be determined from a linear elastic analysis of the entire frame or of suitable subframes (see 5.6.4). Moments due to hoaontal loads should be determined by a linear elastic analysis of the whole frame. The elastic momeb diagram for any member may be modified by up to.10 % of the peak elastic moment in that member for the same combination of loads prov~ded that: (a) the forces and moments in the frame remain in equilibrium; (b) a l l the members in which the moments are reduced have compact cross sections; (c) moments are not reduced about the minor axis of any column. The capacity and buckling resistance should be determined in accordance with section four.
Kz'VX for design.grade 50 steel (94~2 1 0 ~ ) ~ ~ ~ where

r is the minimum radius of gyration of the rafter ,
section; x i s the torsional index of the rafter section;
K , and K 2 have the following values:
5.6.2 Non-sway frames A frame which satisfies theconditionsof 5.1.3 for non-sway
frames should be analysed using ordinary linear elastic methods (including the use of suitable subframes).
BS 5 9 5 0 : Part 1 : 1990 Section five
The effective length of the columns may be obtained from appendix E taking the columns as braced against sidesway. Vertical load and horizontal loads should be applied in accordance with 5.1.2.1 and 5.1.2.2.
members. Plastic design may then be carried out providing that the buckling resistance of the members is checked by reference to 4.8.3.3.
5.7.3 Sway frames 5.7.3.1 General. Plastic design may be used where proper allowance is made for frame instability effects. This may be done by carrying out a full elastic-plastic sway analysis or by using the simplified method given in 5.7.3.3. The load factors employed should be those given in table 2.
The frame should be checked under all combinations of loading taking the effective length of the columns in the plane of the frame as 1.OL. When considering vertical loading in the absence of wind load the notional horizontal loading of 5.1.2.3 should be applied. Where the strength of the frame is increased for any reason the stability of the columns may be checked using the original factored loads rather than the enhanced collapse loads of the frame.
5.6.3 Sway frames

A frame which does not satisfy the conditions of 5.1.3 for non-sway frames should be designed as a sway frame.
Initially the frame should be checked under pattern vertical loading a for a non-sway frame. For this purpose the s effective length of the columns should be obtained from appendix E taking the columns as braced against sidesway. The effects of sway should then be accounted for under all combinations of loading. When considering vertical loading in the absence of wind loads the notional horizontal loads given in 5.1.2.3 should also be applied. Either of the following methods may be used. (a) Extended simple design. The effective length of the columns in the plane of the frame should be obtained from appendix E allowing for sidesway. (b) Amplified sway method. The moments due to horizontal loading should be amplified by the factor:
Acr
5.7.3.2 Pattern loading. The columns should also be checked against pattern vertical loading using an effective s length from appendix E taking the column a braced against sidesway. 5.7.3.3 Simple check for frame stability. The following conditions should be satisfied.
(a) The plastic hinge mechanism should be a sway mode with hinges assumed in all the beams and at the base of each column but no other plastic hinges in the columns. (b) The lower lengths of the columns should be designed to remain elastic under the theoretical hinge moments assumed in (a). (c) Under all combinations of unfactored loading (including the notional horizontal force when wind loads are not included in the combination) it should be possible by means of moment redistribution to produce sets of moments and forces throughout the frame which are in equilibrium with the applied loads and under which all members remain elastic. (d) I n ' e d frames where no account is taken of the stiffening effect of wall panels the following relationship should be satisfied:
(h- - 1 )
where )L, is the elastic critical load factor obtained from appendix F.
The effective length of the columns in the plane of the frame should be taken a 1.0 L. s
5.6.4 Subframes 5.6.4.1 Vertical loads. In the elastic analysis of any rigid frame the subframes shown in figure 1 1 may be used to determine the forces and moments due to vertical loads.
Alternative1y the beam moments may be obtained by analysing the beams a continuous over simple supports at s the columns, the column moments being obtained from the column design subframe in figure 11*.
5.6.4.2 Horizontal loads The moments due to horizontal loads should be determined separately by means of a linear elastic analysis of the whole frame.
(t)A ,,
x.
5.7 Multi-storey rigid frames: plastic design

5.7.1 General
Plastic design may be used provided the frame is effectively braced against sidesway out of its own plane. The conditions of 5.1 and 5.3 should be satisfied.
> 4.6;
(2) when 4.6 <Acr
(3) when X,
where
< 1 0 : A, > -. (Aer > 1 0 : A, > 1;
O.9Xc,
1)'
,A A ,
is the elastic critical load factor from appendix F;

is the rigid-plastic load factor of the overall frames but should not be less than 1 locally.
5.7.2 Non-sway framer For the purpose of this clause a non-sway frame should have an effective system of bracing, satisfying the criteria of 5.1.3, independent of the bending stiffness of the frame
A, i s the ratio by which each of the fact0re.d loads

would have to be increased to cause plastic collapse of the actual frame determined in accordance with (a) and (b).
'Further deta~ls subframes may be obtained from: Institution of Structural Engineers.Joint Committee Report on Fully Rigid Multiof
Storey Welded Steel Frames, Dec. 1964.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

Section five
Where the steel frame is suitably encased i n concrete the increased second moment of area o f the section may be used t o determine ,A (expressed i n equivalent steel units). , (e) I n unclad frames or in clad frames where the stiffness of the cladding is taken into account the following relationship should be satisfied:
(1 A ,,
2 5.75;
(2)when 5.75
(3) when A ,, , where A,, and A are as i n (dl.
< A < 2 0 : A, ,, > 20 : A, > 1;
.
(Acr - 1 ) '
0.95Acr
Span considered
General
NOTE. Full length of beams and columns
IS
Sub-span
to be used, except for roof beams where there are no upper columns
(a) Beam design sub-frames
General
Column l e n g t h cons~dered
i i
L
External
NOTE. Full length of beams and columns is to be used except for the top storey where there are no upper columns
(b) Column design sub-frames Figure 11. Sub-frarnes
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section six
Section six. Connections
6.1 General recommendations

6.1.1 General
Connections should be designed on the basis of a realistic assumption of the distribution of internal forces, having regard to relative stiffnesses. Such assumption should correspond with direct load paths through the elements of connections. It i s essential that equilibrium with the external applied factored loads i s maintained. Where members are connected to the surface of a web or flange or a section, the local ability of the web or flange to transfer the applied forces should be checked and stiffening provided where necessary. Ease of fabrication and erection should be considered in the design of joints and splices. Attention should be paid to clearances necessary for tightening of fasteners, welding procedures, subsequent inspection, surface treatment and maintenance. The ductility of steel assists the distribution of forces generated within a joint. Therefore residual stresses and stresses due to tightening of fasteners and normal accuracy of f it-up need not usually be calculated. When different forms of fasteners are used to carry a shear load or when welding and fasteners are combined. then one form of connection should normally be designed to carry the total load except that torqued friction grip fasteners may be designed to share the load with welding provided the bolts are fully tightened after welding.
6.1.5 Joints in semi-rigid construction Joints between members in semi-rigid construction should provide a predictable degree of interaction between members, as described in 2.1.2.4. They should be capable of transmitting the restraint moments in addition to the other forces and moments at the joints. I t is important that the connection i s neither too rigid nor too flexible to fulfil accurately the assumptions made in design. 6.7.6 Joints subject to vibration and/or load reversal
Where a connection is subject to impact or vibration, pretensioned friction grip fasteners, locking devices or welding should be used. Where a connection is subject to reversal of stress (unless such stress is due solely to wind) or where for some special of reason slipp~ng bolts is unacceptable, then pretensioned friction grip fasteners or welding should be used. Where repetition of loading makes fatigue a design criterion (see 2.4.3). the fabrication restrictions given in 5.3.7 should be applied.
6.1.7 Splices 6.1.7.1 General. Splices should be designed to hold the connected members in place and wherever practicable the members should be arranged so that the centroidal axis of the splice coincides with the centroidal axis of the members joined. If eccentricity i s present then the resulting forces should be catered for. 6.1.7.2 Splices in compression members Where the members are not prepared for full contact in bearing the splice should be designed to transmit all the moments and forces to which the member at that point i s subjected.
Where the members are prepared for full Contact in bearing the Splice should provide continuity of stiffness about both axes and resist any tension where bending is present The splice should be as near a possible to the ends of the s member or points of inflexion. Where this is not achieved account should be taken of the moment induced by strut action. See C.3.
6.1.2 Intersections
Usually, members meeting a t a joint should be arranged with their centroidal axes meeting at a point. Where there is eccentricitv at intersections the members and connections should be designed to accommodate the moments which result. In the case of bolted framing of angles and tees the setting out lines of the bolts may be adopted instead of the centroidal axis.
6.1.3 Joints i n simple construction

Joints between members in simple construction should be capable of transmitting the forces calculated in design and should be capable of accepting the resulting rotation (see 2.1.2.2). They should not develop significant moments adversely affecting members of the structure.
6.1.7.3 Splices in tension members. The splice covers should beyesigned to transmit all the moments and forces to which the member a t that point is subjected.
k.
6.1.4 Joints i n rigid construction

Joints between members in rigid construction should be capable of transmitting the forces and moments calculated ty from the design method. For elastic design the r ~ g ~ d iof the joint should be not less than that of the members. For plastic design the moment capacity of a joint a t a plastic hinge location should be not less than that of the member and in addition the joint should possess sufficient plastic rotation capacity.
6.1.7.4 .Splices in beams Beam splices should be designed to transmit all the forces and moments in the member at that point and have adequate stiffness.
6.2 Fastener spacing and edge distances

6.2.1 ~i~i~,,,,,
The distance between centres of fasteners should be not less than 2.5 times the nominal diameter of the fastener.
The fabrication restrictions given in 5.3.7 should also be applied where local yield lines are assumed in the design of elements of rigid connections. Th~s applies irrespective of whether or design is used for the structure,
6.2.2 ~~~i~~~ in spacing unstiffened plater

The distance between centres of two adjacent fasteners in a line lying in the direction of stress should not exceed 1 4 t where t is the thickness of the thinner element. Where the members are exposed to corrosive influences the maximum
--
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

Section six
spacing of fasteners in any direction should not exceed 16t or 200 mm, where t i s the thickness of the thinner outside ply.
area, A,, as specified in the appropriate British Standard. For bolts where the tensile stress area is not defined A, should be taken a the area at the bottom of the threads. s Where it can be shown that the threads do not occur in the shear plane A, may be taken a the shank area A. s In the calculation of thread length allowance should be made for tolerance and thread run off.
6.2.3 Minimum edge and end distances The distance from the centre of a fastener hole to the edge or end of any part should be not less than the value given in table 31. The edge distance is the distance from the centre of a hole to the adjacent edge at right angles to the direction of stress. The end distance i s the distance from the centre of a hole to the adjacent edge in the direction in which the fastener bears. The end distance should also be sufficient to provide adequate bearing capacity (see 6.3.3.3 and 6.4.2.2).
For slotted holes, edge and end distances should be measured from the centre of the end radius of the slot, a t the end nearest the edge or end of the material, see figure 1l a .
6.3.2 Shear capacity

Provided that no reductions are required for long joints (see 6.3.4) or large grips (see 6.3.5) the shear capacity, P,, of a bolt should be taken as: P, = P A where p , is the shear strength obtained from table 32; A , is the shear area a defined in 6.3.1, i.e. A or A,. s
Table 31. Minimum edge and end distances to fasteners

Quality of cut Edge and end distanca
6.3.3 Bearing capacity 6.3.3.1 General. The effective capacity of a bolt in bearing on any ply should be taken a the lesser of the bearing s capacity of the bolt (see 6.3.3.2) and the bearing capacity of the connected ply (see 6.3.3.3). 6.3.3.2 Capacity of bolt. The bearing capacity of the bolt itself should be taken as:
Pbb
For a rolled, machine flame cut. sawn or planned edge For a sheared or hand flame cut edgeand any end
I
1.250 1.400
D is the diameter of the hole.
=d r ~ b b
where
d
is the nominal diameter;
i s the thickness of the connected ply, or, if the bolts are countersunk, the thickness of the ply minus half the depth of countersinking;
pbb i s the bearing strength of the bolt obtained from table 32.
6.3.3.3 Capacity of connected ply. The bearing capacity, Pbs,of the connected ply should be taken as:
Pbr = d t br G '/z etp, ~ where
e = end or edge distance
II
II
Figure l l a . Minimum edge and end distances
pbr is the bearing &ength of the connected parts obtained from table 33;
d e
i s the nomir?44 diameter of the bolt;

is the end distance, a defined in 6.2.3; s
is the thickness of the ply, a defined in 6.3.3.2. s
6.2.4 Maximum edge distances The maximum distance to the nearest line of fasteners from an edge of any unstiffened part should not exceed 11te. This rule does not apply to fasteners interconnecting the components of back-to-back tension members (see 4.6.3). Where the members are exposed to corrosive influences the maximum edge distance should.not exceed 40 mm + 4r.
6.3.4 Long joints

When the joint length, Li, a splice or end connection in a of compression or tension element containing more than two bolts (i.e. the distance between the first and last rows of bolts, measured in the direction of which the load i s transferred) exceeds 500 mm, the shear capacity, P,. should be taken as:
6.3 Ordinary bolting

6.3.1 Effective areas of bole
Since threads can occur in the shear plane, the area A, for resisting shear should normally be taken a the tensile stress s
but not more than given in 6.3.5 for large grips, if applicable
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

Section six
where
p, is the shear strength of the bolt, table 32;
Table 32. Strength of bolts in clearance holes

Bolt grade gr 4.6 gr 8.8 Nlmm' Nlrnm' Other grader of fasteners
A, is the shear area;
L, is the joint length (in mm), see figure 12.

6.3.5 Large grip lengths When the grip length. T,, (i.e. the total thickness of the connected plies) exceeds five times the nominal diameter,d, of the bolts, the shear capacity, P,, should be taken as:
Nlmm'
Shear strength, p, Bearing strength, p,, (but see table 33) Tension strength, p,
160 460
375 1035 450
0.48Uf but 0.69 Yf
<
0.72 ( U f + Y f ) 0.58Uf but 0.83 Yf
195
but not more than given in 6.3.4 for long joints, if applicable. 6.3.6 Bolts subject to tension 6.3.6.1 Tension capacity. The tension capacity, P,, of a bolt (including countersunk bolts) should be obtained from: P, = P,A, where
p, is the tension strength obtained from table 32;
<
Yf is the specified minimum yield strength of the fastener.
Ut
is the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of the fastener.
A, is the tensile stress area as specified in the appropriate British Standard. For bolts where the tensile stress area is not defined A, should be taken as the area at the bottom of the threads. 6.3.6.2 Prying. In connections subject to tension prying action need not be taken into account provided the strengths given in table 32 are used. 6.3.6.3 Combined shear and tension. When bolts are subject to both shear and tension then in addition to the conditions in 6.3.1 t o 6.3.6.2 the following relationship should be satisfied:
Table 33. Bearing strength of connected parts for ordinary bolts in clearance holes, pb, Design grade of steel
gr 43 Nlmm' gr 50 Nlmm' Other grades d steel
gr 55
Nlmm' Nlrnm'
460
5 50
650
O.65(Us + Y,)
Y, is the specified minimum yield strength.
Us is the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
6.4 Friction grip fasteners

where
F, is the applied shear; F, i s the applied tension;

P, i s the shear capacity (see 6.3.2);
P, is the tension capacity (see 6.3.6.1).
6.4.1 General For a parallel shank friction grip fastener the transverse capacity should be obtained from the minimum value given by the slip resistance (see 6.4.2.11, the bearing capacity (see 6.4.?&) and, where appropriate, the resistance of long joints (see 6.4.2.3).
, .
Figure 12. Joint length at splice
For a waisted shank fastener the capacity should be obtained from the slip resistance (see 6.4.3) only and the bearing and long joint capacities need not be checked.
NOTE. The slip resistance of a parallel shank friction grip fastener is based on a serviceability criterion but for ease of calculation has been presented in a form which may be checked against factored load. The result of this is that the connection will slip into bearing between the working and the failure load, and for this reason the bearing capacity should be checked against factored load. The shear capacity at the failure load is automatically satisfied by limiting the slip factor, p , to 0.55 provided that the connection is not a long joint. The capacity o f long joints is a shear capacity check. The slip resistance of a waisted shank friction grip fastener is a failure criterion. The connection will not slip into bearing until the factored load has been reached and it is, therefore, not necessary to check the bearing and long joint capacities.
Table 34. Bearing strength of parts connected by parallel shank friction grip fasteners, pb, Design grade of steel'
gr 43 gr 50 gr 55
Other grades of steel
Nlmm'
Nlmm'
Nlrnm'
Nlmm'
825
1065
1210
2.2USbut
< 3.0 Ys
Y, is the specified minimum yield strength of the steel. Us is its specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
6.4.2 Parallel shank friction grip fasteners 6.4.2.1 Slip resistance. The slip resistance, P,,, provided by a parallel shank friction grip fastener should be taken as:
P,, = 1.1 K y P , where Po is the minimum shank tension a specified in s BS 4604;
6.4.3 Waisted shank fasteners: slip resistance

The slip resistance, P,,, provided by a waisted shank friction grip fastener should be taken as: P,, = 0.9KspP, where K s , p and Po are a defined in 6.4.2.1. s
6.4.4 Friction grip fasteners subject to external tension 6.4.4.1 Permitted types. Friction grip fasteners required to carry externally applied tension should comply with BS 4395 : Parts 1 or 3. Fasteners complying with BS 4395 : Part 2 should not be subjected to externally applied tension. 6.4.4.2 Tension capacity. The tension capacity, P,, of a friction grip fastener complying with 6.4.4.1 should be taken as 0.9P0, where Po is the minimum shank tension as specified in BS 4604. 6.4.5 Combined shear and tension
When friction grip fasteners are subject to both shear and tension then in addition to the conditions given in 6.4.1 and 6.4.4 the following relationship should be satisfied:
K, = 1.0 for fasteners in clearance holes;

= 0.85 for fasteners in oversized and short slotted holes, and for fasteners in long slotted holes loaded perpendicular t o the slot;
= 0.6 for fasteners in long slotted holes loaded parallel t o the slot;
1.1 i s the slip factor a defined below Q 0.55. s The slip factor, p, should be determined from the results of tests a specified in BS 4604, except that for general grade s fasteners (i.e. friction grip fasteners complying with BS 4395 : Part 1 or having similar mechanical properties) in connections where the surfaces in contact meet the requirements for untreated surfaces specified in BS 4604 : Part 1 the slip factor may be taken a 0.45. s 6.4.2.2 Bearing resistance. The bearing capacity, Pbg, for parallel shank friction grip fasteners should be taken as:
Pbg = dtpbg where
where
< l/3
F, is the applied shear; F, i s the external-applied tension.

td
etPbO
6.4.6 Holes for friction grip fasteners 6.4.6.1 General. slearance holes should be specified for all friction grip c o n k t i o n s unless oversize or slotted holes are required, when consideration should be given to minimum spacing, edge and end distance, bearing strength and tension capacity in order to provide the necessary strength in the connected parts. 6.4.6.2 Size of holes 6.4.6.2.1 General. The size of holes for friction grip fqsteners should not exceed the dimensionsgiven in table 35. 6.4.6.2.2 Oversize and short slotted holes Oversize and short slotted holes may be used in all plies of a friction grip connection provided that a standard hardened washer is positioned over the holes in the outer plies. 6.4.6.2.3 Long slotted holes. Long slotted holes should not be used in more than one of the connected plies at any individual faying surface.
d
e t
is the nominal diameter of the fastener; is the end distance (i.e. the edge distance in the direction in which the fastener bears);
i s the thickness of the connected ply;
p,, is the bearing strength of the parts connected obtained from table 34.
6.4.2.3 Long joints. Where the joint length. L i , of a splice or end connection containing more than two fasteners (i.e. the distance between the first and last rows of fasteners measured in the direction which the load is transferred) exceeds 500 mm, the slip resistance, P,,, of parallel shank fasteners should be taken as:
where L, IS the ioint length (in mm), see f~gure12. F --'-r than that glven by 6.4.2.1 and 6.4.2.2.
1 :45
---
Table 35. Maximum dimensions of holes

Bolt shank diameter Clearance hole diameter Oversize hole diameter Short sloned hole dimensions Long slotted hole dimensions
mm 22 24 B 27
<
mm d+2 d+2 d+3
mm d+5 d+6 d+8
mm d+2 d+2 d+3
mm d+6 d+8 d+10
mm
mm
d+2 d+2 d+3
2.5d 2.5 d 2.5d
d is nominal bolt diameter (in mm).
Where long slotted holes are used in an outer ply an external plate having sufficient size to completely cover the slot should be provided. Such a washer or plate should be a t least 8 mm thick and of structural material but need not be hardened. Hardened washers should also be placed under the turned element.
where
p,, is the design strength of the pin; A is the cross-sectional area of the pin.
6.5.3.3 Bearing capacity. The bearing capacity of a pin should be taken as: 1.2p,dt
where
6.5 Pin connections

6.5.1 General Pin connected tension members and their connecting parts should comply with 6.5.2. Pin connected compression members need not.
Where the connected elements are clamped together by external nuts the limits on thickness do not apply t o internal plies.
d is the diameter of the pin;
is the thickness of the connected part;
p , i s the lower of the design strengths of the pin and the connected part.
6.5.2 Tension members and pin plates

The thickness of an unstiffened element containing a pinhole should be greater than or equal to 0.25 times the distance from the edge of the hole to the edge of the element, measured at right angles to the axis of the member. See figure 13. The net area beyond a pinhole parallel to, or within 45 " of the axis of th_emember should be greater than or equal to the net area A required for the member. The sum of the areas a t the pinhole perpendicular to the axis of the member should be at least 1.33A. See figure 13. Pin plates provided t o increase the net area of a member or to increase the bearing capacity of a pin should be arranged to avoid eccentricity and should be of sufficient size to distribute the load from the pin into the member.
6.5.3.4 Bending. The bending moments on a pin should be calculated on the assumption that the forces transmitted between the pin and the connected parts are uniformly distributed along the length in contact in each case. The moment capacity of the pin should be taken as:
1.2p,,z where Z p,,
is the elastic modulus of the pin;
is the design strength of the pin.
6.6 Weld detail and design

The details of all welded connections should comply with 6s 5136
6.6.2 Details of fillet welds 6.6.2.1 End returns. Fillet welds terminating at the ends or sides of parts should be returned continuously around the corners for a distance of not less than twice the leg length. s of the weld unless access or the configuration renders , this impracticable. This detail i s particularly important for fillet welds on the tension side of parts carrying a bending load. 6.6.2.2 Lap joints In lap joints the minimum lap should be not less than 4 t where t i s the thickness of the thinner part joined. Single fillet welds should only be used where the parts are restrained to prevent opening of the joint.
6.5.3 Design of pins 6.5.3.1 General. The capacity of a pin connection should be determined from the shear capacity of the pin at the shear planes, see 6.5.3.2, and the bearing capacity on each connected ply, see 6.5.3.3, with due regard to the distribution of load between the plies. The bending moment on the pin should also be checked (see 6.5.3.4).
6.5.3.2 Shear capacity. The shear capacity of a pin should be taken as:
6.6.3 Partial penetration butt welds Partial penetration butt welds should not be used intermittently or in fatigue situations. 6.6.4 Welded details for structural hollow sections A weld connecting two structural hollow sections end-to-end should be a full penetration butt weld.
A = D ~ x ~
(11 t >0.25D4
(2) D , x t > A (3) 2 X D4 X t > 1.332
A weld connecting the end of a structural hollow section to the surface of another member should be continuous and may be either a butt weld throughout, a fillet weld throughout or a fillet weld in one part with a butt weld in another with a continuous change from one to the other. 6.6.5 Design of fillet welds 6.6.5.1 Design strength. The design strength, p of a fillet , , weld made using covered electrodes complying with should be BS 639 obtained from table 36 for the lowest grade of material joined.
-
Figure 13. Pin-endedtension members
6.6.2.3 End connections. Where the end of an element i s connected only by longitudinal fillet welds the length of each weld. L , should be not less than the transverse spacing, T, (see figure 14).
Table 36. Design strength, p,
---I
+=I-+
Design grade of steel
Electrode strength to BS 639 Other types
E43
Nlmm2
51
Nlmm'
51.
Nlmm' Nlmm'
40 or 43 WR50and 50 55
215 215
-
215 255
255
0.5 U, but Q 0.54 Us
275'
1
Figure 14. Welded end connections
Weld stopped short
*Only applies to electrodes having a minimum tensile strength of 550 Nlmm' and a minimum yield strength of 450 Nlmm'. U, is the minimum tensile strength of the electrode based on all weld tensile tests as specified in BS 709.
U s is the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of

L>T,
steel.
the
Where the fillet welds are symmetrically disposed a shown s in figure 15 the s b n g t h of the weld may be taken as equal to the design strerigth of the parent metal provided that: (a) the weld'h made with a suitable electrode (or other welding cons2mable) which will produce all weld tensile specimens as specified in BS 709 having both a minimum yield strength and a minimum tensile strength not less than those specified for the parent metal;
6.6.2.4 Single fillet welds A single fillet weld should not be subject to a bending moment about the longitudinal axis of the weld. 6.6.2.5 Intermittent fillet welds lntermittent fillet welds should not be used in fatigue situations or where capillary action could lead to the formation of rust pockets.
The longitudinal spacing along any one edge of the element between effective lengths of weld, a given in 6.6.5.2, s should not exceed the lesser of 300 mm or 16t for compression elements or 24r for tension elements, where t i s the thickness of the thinner part joined. Back-to-back struts and ties should have spacing of welds in accordance with 4.7.13 and 4.6.3 respectively. End runs of fillet welds should extend to the end of the part connected.
Figure 15. Symmetrical fillet welds
Tension in connected plate
6.6.6.2 Throat thickness of partial penetration butt welds The throat thickness of a partial penetration butt weld welded from one side or the thickness of each throat the weld isprincipally subject to direct compression welded from both sides should be taken as the minimum or tension. death of oenetration. 6.6.5.2 Effective length. The effective length of a run of In the case of a V or bevel weld the depth of penetration fillet weld should be taken a the overall length less one leg s should be taken as the depth of preparation minus 3 mrn. length, s, for each end which does not continue round a Except where it can be shown that greater penetration can corner. consistently be achieved the depth of penetration on one The effective length should be not less than 4s. side for a J or U weld should be taken as the depth of weld preparation. 6.6.5.3 Throat size. The effective throat size, a, of a fillet weld should be taken as the perpendicular distance from The specified penetration should be not less than 2 d t the root of the weld to a straight line joining the fusion where t is the thickness of the thinner part joined (in mm). faces which lies within the cross section of the weld. 6.6.6.3 Design rules for partial penetration butt welds. It should not, however, be taken a greater than 0.7 times s When the weld i s unsymmetrical relative to the parts joined the effective leg length, s. .the resulting eccentricity should be allowed for when 6.6.5.4 Angle of intersection of members connected by calculating the maximum stress and the joint restrained fillet welds. Where the fusion faces form an angle of against rotation. greater than 120 O or less than 60 O the adequacy of the The capacity of a weld comprising of a partial penetration joint should be demonstrated by test. butt weld and a superimposed fillet weld should be calculated a for a fillet weld, a given in 6.6.5. s s 6.6.5.5 Design rules for fillet welds The vector sum of the design stresses due to all forces and moments transmitted by the weld should not exceed the design strength, p . , 6.7 Holding-down bolts The design stress in a fillet weld should be calculated on a thickness equal to the effective throat size, a. Holding-down bolts should be designed t o resist the effect For a fillet weld with unequal size legs, a deep penetration of factored loads determined in accordance with 2.4. fillet weld or a partial penetration butt weld with a They should provide resistance to tension due to uplift superimposed fillet weld, the shear and tension stress on the forces and bending momentsand shear where appropriate. fusion line should not exceed 0 . 7 and l.Op, respectively. ~ ~ Holding-down bolts required to transmit tension should be anchored into the foundation by a washer plate or other 6.6.6 Design of butt welds load distributing member embedded in the concrete; 6.6.6.1 Design strength of butt welds The design strength this plate or member should be designed to span any grout of a full or partial penetration butt weld should be taken as tubes or adjustment tubes provided for the holding-down equal to that of the parent metal, provided that the weld i s bolts. made with a suitable electrode (or other welding consumable) The embedment length of the holding down bolts and the which will produce all weld tensile specimens a specified s arrangement of the load distributing assemblyshould be in BS 709 having both a minimum yield strength and a such that in transmitting the loads from the anchorage to minimum tensile strength not less than those specified for the foundation the load capacity of the foundation is not the parent metal. exceede*
(b) the sum of the throat sizes is not less than the connected plate thickness; The tension capacity of the bolt should be determined in accordance with 6.3.6. Rag bo~f;and indented foundation bolts should not be used to resist uplift forces.
td
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section seven
Section seven. Loading tests
7.1 General
Testing may be undertaken when: (a) the design or construction i s not entirely in accordance with sections one to six of this standard and use is made of experimental verification as recommended in 2.1.2.5 (see tests ( 1 ) and (2) below); (b) design load limits are to be established from a knowledge of the ultimate capacity of a component or structure (see test (3) below); (c) confirmation is required of the consistency of production of components or structures originally justified by t e s t (see test ( 4 ) below); (d) the actual performance of an existing structure is to be established if its capacity i s in question (see test (1) below). To meet these situations a basis i s presented for four types of tests: (1) an acceptance test for confirmation of general structural behaviour; (2) a strength test against the required factored loads;
magnitude of such deflections should be estimated in advance with generous allowances made for movement beyond the elastic range. I t i s important to ensure that the loading system can follow the movements of the specimen without interruption or abnormal restraint. Load and deflection measurements should be controlled a closely as s practicable. In some situations i t may be desirable to determine the magnitude of stresses in a specimen. This may be demonstrated qualitatively by means of brittle coatings or quantitatively by measurements of strain. Such information should be considered supplementary to the overall behaviour as determined by deflections. Where t e s t results are used to establish or confirm the behaviour of similar structures or components the properties of the steel used in the relevant items should be established by coupon tests to validate comparisons between tests carried out on different specimens or a t different times. Coupons should either be cut from the same sections or plates or else recovered from unyielded areas of the specimen after test. Loading should be applied in a number of regular increments at regular intervals in each phase. At each increment the specimen should be carefully examined for signs of rupture, yield or buckling. A running plot should be maintained of loading against principal deflection. When this indicates significant non-linearity, load incrementsshould be reduced. On the attainment of maximum load for either acceptance or strength tests, the load should be maintained for at least 1 hour with recordings of load and deflection being taken at the beginning and end of this period to establish whether the specimen is subject to creep. Unloading should be completed in regular decrements with deflection readings taken at each stage.
(3) a t e s t to determine the ultimate capacity and mode of failure;

(4) a check test to establish consistency of production. Because circumstances and test facilities vary greatly, the test procedure should be agreed in advance by all concerned. These test procedures are intended for steel structures only. For structures of composite construction in steel and concrete reference should be made to BS 5950 : Section 3.1 and Part 4. Structures qualifying for acceptance from loading tests should be of robust and practical construction and reasonably insensitive to incidental loads. Testing of scale models or of items subject to fluctuating loads which could cause fatigue to become the design criterion i s not covered by this section.
7.3 Test procedures

7.3.1 Test loads
acceptance t e s t should be actual dead The test load for load present durinaest x 1.0 + remainder of the dead load x 1.15 + imposed load x 1.25 but need not be taken as more than the a.Pprageof the factored and unfactored load. The test load for a strength test should be based on the factored load calculated in accordance with section two of this standard with appropriate factors applied to dead, imposed and wind loads separately or in combination as appropriate. It is important to recognize that the self weight of the specimen may not be representative of the actual dead load in service. Allowance for any difference should be made in the calculation of the test loads to be applied.
7.2 Test conditions

The design of the test rig should be such that the loading system adequately simulates the magnitude and distribution of the loading and allows the specimen to perform in a manner representative of service conditions. The specimen should be free to deflect under load and lateral and torsional restraints should be representative of those in service. Care should be taken to avoid inadvertent eccentricities at the points of application of the test loads and at the supports. Due attention should be paid to the safety of the test arrangements particularly in ultimate tests. Failure of a test specimen should not lead to general instability of the test rig. Careful consideration should be given to the positions at which deflections are to be measured. The anticipated
7.3.2 Preliminary loading

Prior to any test it may be advantageous to apply (and then remove) preliminary bedding down loading not exceeding the unfactored loads.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section seven
7.3.3 Acceptance test This test i s intended as a non-destructive t e s t for confirming structural performance. The assembly should prove capable of sustaining the test loading a given in 7.3.1. It should be recognized that such s loading applied to certain structures may cause permanent local distortions. Such effects may not indicate structural failure in an acceptance test but the possibility of their occurrence should be agreed before testing. The assembly should demonstrate substantially linear behaviour under test loading and on removal of the test load the residual deflection should not exceed 20 % o f the maximum recorded. If these conditions are not met the test should be repeated and the assembly should demonstrate substantially linear behaviour under test loading and the residual deflection should not exceed 10 % of the maximum recorded. Where this test is being used to relate to performance established in earlier tests, the deflections should be measured at the same positions. The original maximum deflections should not be exceeded by more than 20 %. 7.3.4 Strength test The strength test is used to confirm the calculated capacity of a structure or component. Where a number of items are to be constructed to a common design, and one or more prototypes are tested to confirm their strength, the others may be accepted without further tests provided they are similar in all relevant respects to the prototype (see 7.3.6). Before carrying out the strength test the specimen should first be submitted to and satisfy the acceptance test described in 7.3.3. The capacity of the assembly under test will be dependent on the material properties. The actual yield strength of the steel or steels in the assembly should be determined from coupon tests. An averaged value should be taken from such tests having regard to the importance of each element in the assembly. The test load (including self weight) is given by: Test load = averaged yield strength design strength
has been estimated it may be desirable to adjust its value in the light of the specimen's behaviour. During a test to failure the loading should first be applied in increments up to the strength test load. Consideration of the principal deflection plot should then determine subsequent load increments. The ultimate test load is defined a that point at which the s specimen is unable to sustain any further increases in load. At this point gross permanent distortion is likely to have occurred and in some cases gross deformation may define the test limit. Provided that there is a ductile failure the design capacity of a similar assembly may be determined from: Design capacity = K, design strength averaged yield strength
x ultimate test load

In the case of a sudden ('brittle') failure the averaged yield strength should be replaced by the averaged ultimate tensile strength of the steel, or by 1.2 times the averaged yield strength in the case of a sudden buckling-type failure. In cases where the failure has occurred due to strut or lateral torsional buckling the ratio may be calculated using the two values for the design strength on the appropriate curve for the 'design strength' and 'averaged yield strength'. These values are to be taken at the slenderness ratio appropriate to the situation. For a single test K, should be taken as 0.9 unless the resulting capacity falls below the design capacity confirmed by the strength test, when the latter should be taken. s For two or more related tests K , may be taken a 1.0 provided that the lowest of the individual ultimate test loads is used. 7.3.6 Check tests Where the assembly i s designed on the basis of tests a s defined in 7.l(a) or (b) and a production run i s carried out of that assembly the following precautions should be observed. (a) A n propriate number of samples (not less than two) should e selected from each production batch at random.
) x factored load
At this load there should be no failure by buckling or rupture of any part of the specimen. On removal of the test load the deflection should be reduced by at least 20 %. 7.3.5 Test t o failure I t is only from a test to failure that the real mode of failure and true capacity of a specimen can be determined. Where the item is not required for use i t may be advantageous to secure this additional information after a strength test. Alternatively the objective may be to determine the true design capacity from the ultimate test capacity. In this situation i t is s t i l l desirable to carry out the load cycling of the acceptance and strength tests. An estimate should be made of the anticipated design capacity a a basis for such s tests. Before a test to failure the specimen should first satisfy the strength test described in 7.3.4. Where the design capacity
(b) h e samples should be carefully examined to ensure they are similar in all respects to the prototype tested, particular attention being given to the following items:
(1) dimensions of components and connections; (2) tolerance and workmanship;
(3) quality of steel used. checked with reference to mill certificates.

(c) Where it i s not possible to determine either the variations or the effect of variations from the prototype an acceptance test should be carried out. The maximum recorded deflection should not exceed 120 % of the deflection recorded during the acceptance test on the Rrototype and the residual deflection should not be more than 105 % of that recorded for the prototype.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix A
Appendices
Appendix A. Formal statement of safety factor format adopted in BS 5950: Part 1 to facilitate correlation with I S 0 2394 and BS 5400 : Part 3
coefficient yc which can be considered to be a function of two partial coefficients, ycl and y c 2 , defined a follows. s
A.l Design loads

The design loads, O f , are determined from the nominal loads, Qk, by the relationship:
Q* = Y Q ,Y P Q~ k
y,, is to take account of the nature of the structure and its behaviour, for example structures or parts of structures in which collapse or partial collapse can occur without warning, where redistribution of internal forces i s not possible, or where failure of a element can lead to overall collapse. y,, is to take account of the seriousness of attaining a limit state from other points of view, for example economic circumstances, danger to community.
In general, for the purposes of the design of structures in accordance with the recommendations of this standard, the effects of y,, and y c 2 can be considered to be already incorporated in the values of y, or y m adopted.
where
y p , takes account of the possible deviationof loads from their specified value;
yp, takes account of the reduced probability that various loadings acting together will simultaneously reach their characteristic value.
A.5 Verification of structural adequacy

A.5.1 For a satisfactory design:
R*
i.e.
A.2 Design load effects

The design load effects, S*, are determined from the design loads, Q * , by the relationship:
> S*
1 -function ypm
S* = Effects of y,, Q*
where
A.5.2 In BS 5950 : Part 1, the relationship in A.5.1 is expressed as:

function
y,, takes account of the possible deviation of the behaviour of the structure from that of the design model.
($)
Z Effects of h Q k (dead loadsl +
+ y f Qk (imposed loads) where

y m = y m l ym2 and is taken account of in table 6 for design strength; Yf = YPm'YprrQl Y Qand is as given in table 2. ' ~
A.3 Design resistance

The design resistance. R * , i s determined from the relationship:
R* =
where
1 'YP~
A.9.3 In BS 5400 : Part 3 the relationship in A.5.1 i s expressed as:

1 YfoYml7mz
where function ( f , )
> The effects of r f L Q k
fk y,,
is the characteristic strength of the material; takes account of the possible deviation of the behaviour of the material in the structure from that assumed in design; takes account of the possible reduction in strength of the material from the characteristic value; takes account of manufacturing tolerances.
P Yf3 = YpmTpr * y,, and , ,T ace taken a a single factor ym s

YfL ='Yfl'Yf2
y,, y,,
: ,
A.6 Comparison of partial safety factors
A4 Modification coefficient y,
Where necessary, e.g. for the design of key elements, the value of the partial cooefficients may be modified by a
A comparison of methods of application of partial safety factors in IS0 2394, BS 5400 : Part 3 and BS 5950 i s given in table 37.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix A
Table 37. Comparison of partial safety factors

Partial safety factors
71
YSI
Yz
Y Pm Ya
YPS
YmI Y mI
Ym2 Ymz
Yc 1 Ycl Yc
Ycz Ya
IS0 2394
Yry
BS 5400 : Part 3
Yrl
Yf2
Yf3
I Yrn
Ym2
Y C1 Yc
Y C2
Y ~ = Y f l Yf2 L
BS 5950 : Part 1
7111
Y Q2
Ypm
YPS
I Ym
Ym2
Y c ~ YC
Y Cz
Y P = Ynl Y P Z
L
Y p = Ypm Y p s
Y
Yf = Y u Y p
included in design strength
NOTE. 7 , is implicitly covered in modification of other factors where necsssary.
Appendix B. Lateral torsional buckling of members subject to bending

8.1 Introduction
When an unrestrained beam deflects due to bending in plane, it also deforms out of plane and twists about its longitudinal axis due to imperfections and initial out-ofstraightness. This effect is then amplified by the application of further moment and eventually the beam may buckle at an applied moment less than the full moment capacity of the section. This effect is known as 'lateral torsional buckling'. The theoretical case for lateral torsional buckling is taken a s the elastic critical moment of a simply supported member of uniform section with a uniform moment applied about i t s major axis. the member being restrained at its supports against torsion (i.e. rotation about its longitudinal axis) and lateral deflection but otherwise unrestrained. For real members with other conditions of support, loading or restraint, the actual elastic critical moment varies and modification to the theoretical case may be made in two ways. (a) When the member carries no transverse loading in the length between restraints (i.e. bending i s induced by moments applied at its end or the restraints) the
equivalent uniform moment factor, m, (<1) should be used. This factor i s used to modify the factored applied moment to produce an equivalent uniform moment s which i s then considered a the design moment. (b) For other cases, the value of the equivalent slenderness should be adjusted by use of the slenderness correction factor, n, resulting in a modified value of the buckling resistance moment. Whichever method i s used the factor for the other method should be taken a 1.O. s
8.2 s%kling resistance moment

8.2.1 General
The buckling resistance moment, M , , may be obtained from:
46 =
where
M,
+ (VLT +
ME
ME i s the elastic critical moment (see 8.2.2);
M ,
is the plastic moment capacity = p,S,
BS 5950 : Part 1 : Appendix B
1990
S, i s the plastic modulus about the major axis;

p,
is the design strength;
qLT is the Perry coefficient (see B.2.3).
(b) u , the buckling parameter, and x, the torsional index. are given by: for flanged sections symmetrical about the minor axis:
The above formula for Mb i s the smaller root of:
(ME- Mb)(Mp - Mb) = V L T M E M ~

8.2.2 Elastic criticarmoment The elastic critical moment should be taken as:
u=
(-)
'/4
x = 0.566h,(~/J)'/~
for flanged sections symmetrical about the major axis:
where XLT is the equivalent slenderness (see 8.2.5). B.2.3 Perry coefficient The Perry coefficient, qLT, for lateral-torsionalbuckling should be taken a follows: s (a) for rolled smtions:
VLT = ~ ~ ( A L ALO), - T
In the above:
S, i s the plastic modulus about the major axis;

7 is a factor =
but
VLT 2 0 (b) for w I d e d sections: VLT = ~ Q ~ X L O but VLT
(1 - 2 . ix),
I, is the second moment of area about the major axis;
I , is the second moment of area about the minor

axis;
A is the cross-sectional area of the member;
24b(ALT - ALo)
VLT Z Q ~ ( ~-LALO) T
VLT 2 0
H is the warping constant which may be obtained

from published tables or the approximate formula for flanged sections given in 6.2.5(c);
where
ALT is the equivalent slenderness (see 6.2.5); ,A , is the limiting equivalent slenderness (see 8.2.4);
ab 6.2.4 is a constant, taken a 0.007. s Limiting equivalent slenderness
J is the torsion constant which may be obtained from published tables or the approximate formula for flanged sections given in 6.2.5(c);
h , i s the distance between the shear centres of the flanges.

(c) J the torsion constant, and H, the warping constant, , for flanged sections (see figure 16) may be obtained from the followinq approximate formulae:
The limiting equivalent slenderness should be taken as:
8.2.5 Determination of equivalent slenderness The equivalent slenderness should be taken as: where
1 '.
-.
ALT = nuvh
where
b l and b 2 are the flange widths;

r l and t 2 are the flange thicknesses;
t,
A = LEIr, n, u, v are defined a follows. s

(a) n is determined from consideration of the loading and restraint conditions of the member. For members of uniform cross section throughout their length, n may be obtained from table 13. For lnembers of varying cross section throughout their length, n should be obtained from 6.3.
is the web thickness;
h, i s the distance between the shear centres of the flanges; h , is the web depth.
For plates of normal proportions J = 0.32br3 and thus for flanged sections symmetrical about the minor axis:
x =h,
( Zbr3 + hw )
tw3
Cbt
+ hwtw
'/2
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix B
B.2.6 Box sections (including R H S ) For a box section subject to a moment: hLT = 2.25 (Gb A) I" where 8.2.6.1
"
& is the buckling index = ,
C' :)
&x I )
A is the area; J is the torsion constant which may be obtained from the approximate value given in 8.2.6.2;
y ' i s the factor
(I- 2) ( I -
NOTE. Box sections of uniform wall thickness need not be checked is not for lateral torsional buckling effects provided that A = greater than the limiting values of A given in table 38.
Figure 16. Dimensions for s;rnmetrical
plat* girders
Table 38. Limiting for box sections of uniform wall thickness, including RHS
Dl13
1
A
00
where
b i s the breadth of each plate element;
t is the thickness of each plate element.
350 x 275
pv
(dl v, the slenderness factor, i s qiven by:
,.
3
4
225 x 275
pv
where
170 x 275
pv
N is the ratio
0, are overall depth, breadth 8 (Id + I * ) ' of box respectively. I, is the second moment of area of the compression flange about the minor axis of the section; I,, isthe second moment of area of the tension flange 8.2.6.2 For a box section the value of the torsion constant, J may be obtained from the following approximate , about the minor axis of the section; formula: $ is the monosymmetry index, determined as follows: J= 4 ~ , $ / ~ ( s l t ) where For I or T-section with lipped flanges. J, can be
I, -.
calculated from: 9 = 0 . 8 ( 2 N - 1)
s i s the breadth of each enclosing element;
9 = 1.0(2Nwhere
1)
( );: for N > 0.5 ( +);- for N < 0.5 :

1+1
t i s the thickness of each element.
For an RHS a more accurate value is given by:
where
D L is the depth of the lip; D is the overall depth of the section.

NOTE. When the flange of the section is not lipped. DL = 0.
and hence
h i s the mean perimeter; A, i s the area enclosed by the mean perimeter; is the thicknessof the section.
+ .= 0.8(2N-1 I for N > 0.5

JI = l.O(ZN-1) for N
< 0.5
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix C and D
8.2.7 Plates and flats For an individual plate, flat, or other solid rectangular section subject to a moment about i t s major axis: L d '12 ,A , = n 2.8
C.2 Perry factor

The Perry factor, 17, for flexural buckling under load should be obtained from:
(*)
17 = 0.001a(h- A ) ,
where
a
but not less than zero
where
L E is the effective length;
d i s the depth;
t
is the Robertson constant, which has the following values:
i s the thickness;
is as given in 4.3.7.6.
8.3 Beams of varying section throughout their length

When the section of a beam varies along i t s length between restraint points, the bending strength, p,, is determined using the properties of the section at the point of maximum moment. This value of p , applies throughout the length between adjacent restraints. Provided that Rf is not less than 0.2, the value of n to be used in the expression for hLT should be determined from: n = ( 1 . 5 - 0.5Rf) but>l.O; where Rf is the ratio of the flange area at the point of minimum moment to that at the point of maximum moment between adjacent restraint points; Rf refers either to the ratio of total area of both flanges or t o the area of the compression flange only, whichever gives the smaller value of R. , For non-uniform sections, m = 1.0 (see 4.3).
2.0 for table 27(a) 3.5 for table 27(b) 5.5 for table 27(c) 8.0 for table 27(d) h is the slenderness (see 4.7.3):
X is the limiting slenderness, which should be taken as: ,
C.3 Strut action

The moment due to strut action has a maximum value Mmaxmidway between points of inflexion of the buckled shape (the points between which the effective length is measured) given by:
where
f , is the compressive stress due to axial load;
S is the plastic modulus.

The moment at any other point can be obtained by assuming a sinusoidal variation, i.e. the moment due to strut action at a point, distance Lx from a point of inflexion, is given by:
Appendix C. Compressionstrength: Perry strut formula
C.l Basis
The compressive strength, p,, may be obtained from:
Appendix D. Effective lengths of struts in simple construction D.l Stanchions for single storey buildings (see 4.7.2(c))
D. 1.1 Typical cases
where 4 = where
p y + ( q +I ) P E
p, is the Euler strength (n2/A2 ); p, is the design strength;
Figures 17 t o 21 illustrate how the effective lengths of typical stanchions in single storey buildings may be determined provided the following conditions apply. (a) In the plane of the diagram the stanchions act as cantilevers tied together by the roof trusses, but in this plane the tops of the stanchions are not otherwise held in position or restrained in direction.
q is the Perry factor.

The above formula for p, is the smaller root of:
@E -pC)@y - p c ) = W E P ,
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix D
(b) Perpendicular to the plane of the diagram, the tops of the stanchions are effectively held in position by members connecting them to a braced bay, or by other suitable means. In the case of figures 19 to 21 the braced bay also holds the columns in position at crane girder level. (c) The bases of the stanchions are effectively held in position and restrained in direction in both planes. (d) The foundations are capable of providing restraint commensurate with that provided by the base.
0.1.2 Variations
Where the conditions differ from those given in D . l . l the following variations to the effective lengths shown in figures 17 to 21 may arise. (a) If, in the plane of the diagram, the tops of the stanchions are effectively held in position by horizontal bracing or other suitable means, the effective lengths in this plane may be obtained from table 24. (b) If, in the plane of the diagram, the roof truss or other roof member is connected to the stanchions by a connection capable of transmitting appreciable moment. the effective length of the stanchion in this plane may be determined in accordance with appendix E. (c) If, perpendicular to the plane of the diagram, one flange only of the stanchion is restrained at intervals by sheeting rails, then for buckling out of the plane of the diagram the method given in appendix G may be used. (d) If, perpendicular to the plane of the diagram, the base of the column i s not effectively restrained in direction the effective lengths 0.85 L or 0.85 L , in figures 17 to 21 should be increased to 1.0 L or 1.0 L 1 respectively.
1.
Effectiue length of stanchion Axis X-X 1.5L

Axis Y-Y
=
0.85L
Figure 17. Side stanchion
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix D
Alternative methods of restraint
Effective length of stanchion Axis X-X = 1.5L Axis Y - Y = 0.85Ll, .OL,or l.OL, 1 whichever is the greatest
Effective length of stanchion Axis X-X = 1.5L Axis Y-Y = 0.85L1
Figure 18. Side stanchion with restraints
Figure 19. Simple side stanchion with crane gantry
BS 5950 : Part 1 : Appendix D
1990
1 I
2 '
-- --.A.
I
--
-Y2
I . i X
L2
Effective length of stanchions Upper roof stanchion Axis X-X = 1.5L, Axis Y-Y = Y,-Y, = L , Lower roof stanchion Axis B-B = 0.85L AxlsY-Y = L , . L , , L , orL, whichever is the greatest Crane stanchion Axis B-B = 0 . 8 5 L Axts Y , - Y , = L,, L , , L, or L , whichever is the greatest Combined roof and crane stanchions Axis A-A = 1 . 5 L Axis B-B = 0 . 8 5 L
'3
L4
, .
Figure 20. Compound side stanchion with crane gantry
Lower roof stanchion
BS 5950 : Part Appendix D
1 : 1990
Roof stanchion
B,--
+--B1
Effective length of stanchions Roof stanchion Axis B, - 8 , = L , Axis A-A = 1 . 5 L 1 Axis B-B = 0.85 L AxisY-Y=L,.L,,L, orL, whichever is the greatest Combined crane stanchion Axis A-A = 1.6L Axis B-B = 0.85L
Figure 21. Compound valley stanchion with crane gantry
BS 5950 : P a n 1 : 1990 Appendix E
Appendix E. Effective lengths of struts in rigid frames E.l General

The effective length, L E , of a column in a multi-storey beam and column-type frame with rigid joints may be assessed using the limited frame method given in E.2. For buildings which do not satisfy the conditions for a non-sway frame given in 5.1.3 the stiffening effect of infill wall panels may be taken into account using the method given in E.3. Other cases including the effects of axial loads in the restraining members may be dealt with by reference to E.4.
K"
KT L '(1 Column being K( = I / L designed KBL k2
KL
KTR
KBR
E.2 Limited frame method

E.2.1 Effective length
The effective length, L E ,of a column may be obtained by using the limited frame shown in figure 22. The effective length ratio, L E / L ,may be obtained from figures 23 or 24 a appropriate using the joint restraint coefficients, k , s and k 2 , obtained from:
k, =
Kc
Ku
Kc + Ku + K T L + K T R
k =
Total column stiffness at joint Total stiffness of all members a t joint
kl =
Kc
KL
Where any member shown in figure 22 is not present in the actual structure or is not rigidly connected to the column s being designed i t s stiffness should be taken a zero. Where under the same loading condition any restraining member is required to carry more than 90 % of its reduced moment capacity (i.e. moment capacity reduced for axial load) its stiffness should be taken a zero. If one end of the s column is loaded t o more than 90 % o f its reduced moment capacity then the joint restraint coefficient, k, for that end should be taken as unity.
K~+KL+KBL+KBR
where K, and K L are the values for I I L for the adjacent upper and lower column lengths and
KT,, KT,, K s L and K B Rare the values of I / L for the adjacent beams
Figure 22. Restraint coefficients for limited frame
E.2.2 Beam stiffness

The stiffness, K,, of a beam directly supporting a concrete floor slab should be taken a IIL. s In any other case K, should be determined as given in E.4.1.
E.2.3 Base stiffness

The base stiffness should be determined by reference to 5.1.2.4.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix E
E.3 Partial sway bracing

E.3.1 Introduction
Where buildings do not satisfy the conditions for non-sway frames given in 5.1.3 the stiffening effect of wall panels may be taken into account. Providing that the panels comply with E.3.2, figures 25 and 26 may be used in association with the method given in E.2. The relative stiffness, k 3 , is given in E.3.3. For intermediate values of k 3 between 0 and 1 or 1 and 2 interpolation may be carried out using figure 24 for k 3 = 0.
where
h is the storey height;
b i s the width of the panel;
is the thickness of the panel; E, is the modulus of elasticity for the panel material.
t
E.4 Critical buckling mode of frames

E.4.1 Rectilinear frames
In a beam and column type rigid jointed frame (other than a frame where the beams support a concrete floor slab) the limited frame method given in E.2 may be used provided that the frame is reasonably regular in layout. In determining the stiffness, K of a beam due account , should be taken of the degree of fixity afforded to its far end in the relevant buckling mode of the frame. The critical mode for a rectilinear frame in which sway is prevented i s shown in figure 27. The beams are bent in single curvature and the relevant beam stiffness Kb = 0.5//L. The critical sway mode for a rectilinear frame is shown in figure 28. The beams are bent in double curvature and the relevant beam stiffness, K b , should be taken as 1.51/L. Where the in-plane effective lengths have a significant influence on the design it may be preferable to obtain the effective lengths from the elastic critical load factor, A,, of the frame (see appendix F).
E.3.2 Wall panels

To be effective a wall panel should be located in the plane of the frame and extend the full clear height of the storey. I t may be composed of any material capable of resisting a diagonal compressive force.
E.3.3 Relative stiffness

The relative stiffness, k 3 , of the effective bracing in any storey may be taken as:
where h is the storey height; per horizontal unit deflection) of the panels in that storey of the frame (see E.3.4); is the modulus of elasticity of steel; E Z Kc i s the sum of the stiffnesses I I L of the columns in that storey of the frame.
CS, is the sum of the spring stiffnesses (horizontal force
E.4.2 Axial loads

The limited frame method given in E.2 may be extended to rigid jointed frames in which the restraining members are subject to axial loads. This is providing that: (a) the frame satisfies the conditions of 5.1.3 for nonsway frames; (b) Proper account is taken of the effects of axial load on the stiffness of the restraining members.
E.3.4 Stiffness of panels , The spring stiffness, S of a wall panel may be determined from:
Figure 27. Critical buckling mode of frame braced against sidesway
Figure 28. Critical buckling mode of frame free to sway
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix F and G
Appendix F. Frame instability F.l General

Frame instability, as covered by this appendix, is related to the design of multi-storey rigid-jointed frames subject to sidesway. The elastic critical load factor, X which may be ,, determined using the deflection method a given in F.2 or s any other recognized method, is used in the amplified sway moments method (see 5.6.3(b)) for elastic design and in the simple check for frame-stability (see 5.7.3.3) for plastic design. The elastic critical load factor, A,,, of a frame is the ratio by which each of the factored loads would have to be increased to cause elastic instability.
where h is the storey height; b is the width of the braced bay; C K , is the sum of the stiffness. I I L , of the columns in that storey.
Appendix G. Design of restrained members with an unrestrained compressionflange G.l General

G. 1.1 lntroduction
This appendix deals with the design of members or portions of members between effective torsional restraints to both flanges which are restrained by intermediate restraints in such a way as to leave a compression flange unrestrained. See fioure 29.
F.2 Deflection method

F.2.1 Introduction
An accurate method (ordinary linear elastic) should be used t o determine the horizontal deflections of the frame due to horizontal forces applied at each floor level and equal to 0.5 % o f the factored vertical loads applied at that level. Allowance should be made in this deflection calculation for the degree of rigidity of the base a given in F.2.2. s
6.1.2 Failure mode 6.1.2.1 The capacity of the member should be checked in accordance with 4.8.3.2. 6.1.2.2 The buckling resistance should be checked between intermediate restraints as given in 4.8.3.3 using an effective length L E equal to the spacing of the intermediate restraints. 6.1.2.3 The overall buckling of the member in the torsional mode between effective torsional restraints to both flanges should be checked according to the provisions of this appendix. 6.1.3 Elastic stability
Members or portions of members restrained a in G.l.l s which do not contain plastic hinge locations should be checked according to G.2(a) to ensure stability between effective torsional restraints t o both flanges.
F.2.2 Base stiffness

The base stiffness should be determined by reference to 5.1 2.4.
F.2.3 Value of A,,

1
2006~rnax where $ , is the largest value for any storey of the sway index, 4, (see F.2.4). F.2.4 Sway index, @ , , The sway index, $ of each storey is given by:
$,= where h i s the storey height;
Acr =
6" - 6,
6 , is the horizontal deflection of the top of the storey; 6 is the horizontal deflection of the bottom of the , storey.
F.2.5 Partial sway bracing
s I n any storey the stiffening effect of infill wall panels a given in E.3.3 (up to a maximum relative stiffness, k , , of 2) may be allowed for by introducing a diagonal strut in that storey of area A given by:
G.1.4 Plastic stability ~ e m b e n B portions of members restrained a in G.l.l r s which contain plastic hinge locations should be checked accordkg to G.Z(b) to ensure stability between effective torsionil restraints t o both flanges.
Full lateral restraint should be provided to the compression flange at all plastic hinge locations, or where this i s impracticable within Dl2 of the hinge location where D i s the depth of the member.
G.2 Stability
Members or portions of members restrained as in (3.1.1 should satisfy one of the following conditions to ensure stability between effective torsional restraints. (a) Elastic stability (see 6.1.3)
A =
h (hlb)
[I + (hlb)
'1 "'
(1) Uniform members
BS 5950 : P a n 1 : 1990 Appendix G
JC -B
X
Uniform member
Compression flange
&
I
Compression flange Compression flange
/B -4e -x-x-x-x-x-x-x-xX-8
. --
Lt
-----
Tapered members
x
Effective torsional restraints to both flanges. Lateral restraints to one flange. Axial load where present. Applied moment in either direction.
A-A Reference axis. B-B Restraint axis. 1, Length under consideration.
F M
Figure 29. Members restrained on tension flange
(2) Tapered members
XTC is as defined in 6.3.2;
- + - Q p b at any section.
A Sx (b) Plastic stability (see G.1.4). For uniform members use (1) or (2); tapered members use (2). for
( 1) Lengths without lateral loads
=rn,MA;
m, is a defined in G.3.4; s
(2) Lengths with lateral loads
where
F
P,
i s the applied axial load where present; is the compression resistance determined in accordance with 4.7.4 except that for buckling about the minor axis the slenderness should be taken a; , ,A s
M A is the maximum moment on the member or portion of the member under consideration; Mb = pbSx Q P ~ Z ; i s the lateral torsional buckling resistance p , determined in accordance with 4.3.7 except that the equivalent slenderness should be taken a ;,A s, XTB i s a defined in G.3.3; s M is the applie+poment at the section considered; A is the cross-s8ctional area at the section considered; i s the plastic modulus a t the section considered; S , M =pvSx; ? ' , Mpr =pVSrx; S , i s the reduced plastic modulus due to axial load; a i s as defined in G.3.1; L k i s a defined in G3.5; s n, is a defined in G.3.6; s c is as defined in 6.3.3.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix G
G.3 Determinationof factors

G.3.1 General See figure 30.
Bd-+-+-+-+-+-*.A-*
L
x
*-rA
d
Lt
Lateral restraints to one flange Effective torsional restraints to both flanges A-A Reference axis 0-0 Restraint axis a Distance between reference axis and restraint axis L , Length over which buckling is to be checked
Figure 30. Typical haunch
6.3.2 Minor axis slenderness ratio, ATc The minor axis slenderness ratio used to determine the compression resistance in G.2 should be taken as:
For tapered members v, is calculated by reference to the smallest section: where a is a defined in G.3.1; s
ATC 'Y A
where
A is the slenderness L / r Y of the member between

effective torsional restraints to both flanges;
A is as defined in G.3.2; h, is as defined in G.3.2;

x is a defined in 4.3.7.5; s u is a defined in 4.3.7.5 except for tapered members s where u should be taken a 1.0; s n, i s taken a 1.0 where there are no intermediate loads s betyeen restraints; otherwise n, i s a defined in G.3.6; s
a is a defined in G.3.1; s
h, is the distance between the shear centres of the flanges; x is a defined in 4.3.7.5. s
G.3.3 Minor axis slenderness ratio, ATE The minor axis slenderness ratio, XTB, used to determine the bending resistance in G.2 should be taken as:
c i s taten a 1.0 for uniform members and as follows s ffr tapered members:
where
R is the ratio of the greater depth to the lesser depth of thesection between effective torsional restraints;
q i s the ratio of the tapered length to the total length
ATE = n,uv,cA
4a -
1'A
of the section between effective torsional restraints. G.3.4 Equivalent uniform moment factor, m, The value of m, should be taken a 1.0 when intermediate s loads are applied between effective torsional restraints.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix G
Otherwise m, should be obtained from table 39 where:
y is obtained from G.3.2;
0,
is the ratio of the algebraically smaller end moment to the larser. Moments which produce compression on the unrestrained flange should be taken as positive. , s When 0 < - 1 the value of 0, should be taken a - 1. See f de 31. ir i NOTE. This definition of 0, is different to that given for p
Only positive values of N should be included. N i s positive when it produces compression in the unrestrained flange. Where axial load is present see G.3.6.2. M I to M, are the moment capacities of the sections corresponding to N , to N , , but see G.3.6.3. Ns . Nz N3 Na - i s the greater of - Ms M2' M ~ M 4 '
in 4.3.7.
G.3.5 Limiting length, L , The limiting length, L k , should be taken as:

(5.4 + 600
NE . N I Nj - IS the greater of - ME M I ' M5 Only positive values of included.
Lk =
3)v x r E
l)lh
(2
3 ) should be
ME
(5.4 EX x 2 E
wherex is as defined in 4.3.7.5. For tapered members L , should be calculated for the smallest section.
G.3.6.2 Axial loading. Where elastic stability i s considered no allowance should be made in the value of n, for the effects of axial load. Where plastic stability is being considered the values of N , to N S should be taken as:
N+aF where
G.3.6 Slenderness correction factor, n, G.3.6.1 General. The general expression of the slenderness correction factor, n,, is given by:
+l/2
a is the distance between the reference axis and the axis of restraint;
F is the applied axial load. G.3.6.3 Moment capacities. For elastically designed members of uniform section M I to M S should be taken as:
M = P,Z, where Z, is the elastic modulus for the compression flange of the section, In
Other
where
N I to N S are the values of the applied moments at the

ends of the quarter points and mid length of the length between effective torsional restraints a shown in figure 32. s
cases
is given by:
M = P,S, where S, i s the plastic modulus of the section.
taken as
- 1.0.
Figure 31. Value of
P,
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix G and H
Table 39. Equivalent uniform moment factor, m,
0 -1.0 -0.9 -0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
0.1 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.81 0.83 0.85 0.86 0.88 0.89 0.90 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 0.98 0.99 1.00 1.00
0.2 0.61 0.63 0.64 0.66 0.67 0.69 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88 0.91 0.93 0.95 0.98 1.00
0.3 0.51 0.52 0.53 0.55 0.56 0.58 0.59 0.61 0.63 0.65 0.68 0.70 0.73 0.76 0.79 0.82 0.85 0.89 0.92 0.96 1.00
0.4 0.44 0.45 0.46 0.47 0.49 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.57 0.59 0.62 0.65 0.68 0.71 0.75 0.78 0.82 0.87 0.91 0.95 1.00
0.5 0.39 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.44 0.46 0.48 0.50 0.53 0.55 0.58 0.62 0.65 0.69 0.72 0.76 0.81 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00
0.6 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.39 0.40 0.42 0.45 0.47 0.50 0.53 0.56 0.59 0.63 0.67 0.71 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00
0.7 0.31 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 0.40 0.43 0.45 0.48 0.51 0.55 0.58 0.62 0.66 0.70 0.75 0.79 0.84 0.89 0.95 1.00
0.8 0.28 0.30 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 0.41 0.44 0.47 0.50 054 0.57 0.61 0.65 0.70 0.74 0.7s 0.84 0.89 0.95 1.00
0.9 0.26 0.28 0.30 032 0.34 0.37 0.40 0.43 0.46 0.49 0.53 0.57 0.61 0.65 0.69 0.74 0.79 0.84 0.89 0.94 1.00
1.0 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.30 0.33 0.36 0.39 0.42 0.45 0.49 0.52 0.56 0.60 0.65 0.69 0.74 0.79 0.84 0.89 0.94 1.00
1.1
1.2 0.21 0.23 0.26 0.28 0.31 0.34 0.37 0.41 0.44 0.48 0.52 0.56 0.60 0.64 0.69 0.74 0.79 0.84 0.89 0.94 1.00
0.22 0.24 0.27 0.29 0.32 0.35 0.38 0.41 0.45 0.48 0.52 0.56 0.60 0.64 0.69 0.74 0.79 0.84 0.89 0.94 1.00
Figure 32. Intermediate momentri
Appendix H. Web buckling H.l Shear buckling without utilizing tension field action
The critical shear strength, q,, of a web panel is given by the following. (a) When A,
where
X ,
is the equivalent slenderness of the web given by:
(0.6~,,,/q.)"~ q e is the elastic critical shear strength of the panel (in ~ / r n r n ') given by: (1 1 when a/d < 1 : qe = [o-75 1
+
Q 0.8
[=]
1000
Qcr = 0 . 6 ~ ~ ~ (b) When 0.8 < X, < 1.25 qcr = 0.6pvw [ I - 0.8(XW - 0.8)] (c) When A, 2 1.25
Qcr
is the spacing of transverse stiffeners; is the depth of the web; is the thickness of the web; is the design strength of the web.
= 4e
p,,
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Appendix H
H.2 Shear buckling utilizing tension field action

The basic shear strength of the web panel, q,, i s given by:
(b) when fc is tensile

[ ( f e d ) 2 ( f c ) 2 ]
Ped
when ( f e d ) 2 , ( f c ) 2
Ped pc.cr
f ~ )
Pc.cr
where
y,
or is the basic tension field strength given by:

Yb =
Pc.cr
-( f e d ) 2 ] %
Ped
when
-2
pc.cr
ifed)
> -
\Ped
dOyw2 -
34,r2 + @ t 2 ) " 2 -
in which 4, =
4%
where is the maximum moment in the web panel; M, Mcr i s the buckling resistance moment of the web panel given by:
Mcr = P b . c r S w ;
(1 + (aldI2 ) %
The flange-dependent shear strength factor, q f , is given by:

qf = [ 4 ~ 3 sin
where 0 = tan-' a d
(5) (3
( * P lVh ] ) W
0.6pyw
p b , c ri s the critical bending strength of the web panel given by:

1630
i s the spacing of transverse stiffeners;
is the depth of the web; is the thickness of the web;
S ,
fc
p,,,,
i s the plastic modulus of the web
pyw is the design strength of the web.

NOTE. If q b i s greater than 0 . 5 7 p y w it may be taken as equal to but not greater than 0 . 6 ~ ~ ~ .
is the mean longitudinal compressive stress in the web (if this stress i s tensile fc i s negative); is the critical axial strength of the web panel given by the following:
H.3 Thin or slender webs designed for combined stresses

H.3.1 General
(1) when one flange is in tension:
This clause is for checking thin or slender webs which have been designed as subject to longitudinal stresses due to bending or directly applied loads. The longitudinal stresses should be considered as consisting of either: (a) pure bending stress (equal compressive and tensile stresses symmetrical about the middepth of the panel); (b) pure bending stress combined with uniform axial stress. This arises whenever the middepth of the panel does not coincide with the neutral axis of the girder, whether or not an axial load is applied.
(2) when both flanges are subject to compression: (i) for sections built-up by welding
815
43PY
16 + dltc
(ii) for rolled sections
H.3.2 Combination of stresses

The following interaction expression should be satisfied:
When compressive edge loading is also applied (see 4.5.2.2) the term f C / p c . , , should be replaced as follows: (a) when fc is compressive
+
[(-)'
fc Pc.cr
("d) ped
'1
is tho m a x h u m shear stress in the panel; is tho shear buckling strength of the web panel. pq Generally pq = qcr but i f the web is designed using tension field action a given in 4.4.5.4 then s Pq q b ; is the basic shear strength of the web panel a s qb given in 4.4.5.4.1; s qcr is the critical shear strength of the web panel a given i n 4.4.5.3; is the compression stress due t o edge loading fed a given in 4.5.2.2 (if edge loading i s tensile fed i s s zero); ped is the compressive strength for edge loading as given in 4.5.2.2.
fv
Publications referred to
BS 4 Structural steel sections Part 1 Specification for hot rolled sections
BS 29 BS 639 BS 709 BS 2573 BS 2655 BS 2853 BS 3100 BS 3692 BS 4190 BS 4320
Specification for carbon steel forgings above 150 m m ruling section Specification for covered carbon and carbon manganese steel electrodes for manual metal . arc weld~ng Methods of destructive testing fusion welded joints and weld metal i n steel Rules for the design of cranes Part 1 Specification for classification, stress calculations and design criteria for structures Specification for lifts, escalators, passenger conveyors and paternosters Specificat~on the design and testing of steel overhead runway beams for Specification for steel castings for general engineering purposes Specification for I S 0 metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Metric units Specification for I S 0 metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts Specification for metal washers for general engineering purposes. Metric units
BS 4395 Specification for high strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and washers for structural engtneering Part 1 General grade Part 2 Higher grade bolts and nuts and general grade washers Part 3 Higher grade bolts (waisted shank), nuts and general grade washers BS 4449 Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete BS 4482 Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement o f concrete BS 4483 Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement o f concrete BS 4604 Specification for the use of high strength friction grip bolts i n structural steelwork. Metric series Part 1 General grade Part 2 Higher grade (parallel shank) Part 3 Higher grade (waisted shank) BS 4848 specification for h o t rolled structural steel sections Part 2 Hollow sections Part 4 Equal and unequal angles Part 5 Bulb flats BS 4933 Specification for I S 0 metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and screws w i t h hexagon nuts BS 5135 Specification for the process of arc welding o f carbon and carbon manganese steels BS 5400 Steel. concrete and composite bridges Part 3 Code o f practice for the design of steel bridges Part 10 Code of practice for fatigue BS 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork i n building Part 2 Specification for materials, fabrication and erection : hot rolled sections Part 3 Design i n composite construction Section 3.1 Code o f practice for design of single and continuous composite beams 'Section 3.2 Code of practice for design of composite columns and frames Part 4 Code o f practice for design of floors w i t h profiled steel sheeting Part 5 Code o f practice for design of cold formed sections BS 6399 Loading for buildings Part 1 Code o f practice for dead and imposed loads Part 3 Code of practice for imposed roof loads BS 8004 Code of practice for foundations BS 81 10 Structural use of concrete Part 1 Code o r practice for design and construction CP 3 Code of basic data for the design of buildings Chapter V Loading Part 2 Wind loads I S 0 2394 General principles o n reliability for structures BS E N 10002-1 Metallic materials - Tensile tasting Part 1 Method of test BS E N 10025 H o t rolled products of non-alloy structural steels: Technical d e l i v e ~ n d i t i o n r '
I n preparation.
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

This British Standard, having been prepared under the direction of the Civil Engineering and Building Structures Standards Policy Committee. was published under the authority of the Board of BSI and comes i n t o effect o n 3 1 July 1990 @British Standards Institution. 1990 First published August 1985 Second edition July 1990 ISBN 0 5 8 0 18566 4 The following BSI references relate t o the work on this standard: Committee reference CSBl27 Draft for comment 87115229 DC Revision of British Standards. Brit~sh Standards are rev~sed, when necessary, by the Issue elther o f amendments or of revised e d ~ t ~ o n s It is important that users of British Standards should ascertain that they are I n possession of the latest amendments or e d ~ t ~ o n s . Automatic updating service. BSI provides an economlc, ~ ~ d r v ~ d u a l and automatic standards updat~ng servlce called PLUS Deta~ls are ava~lable from BSI E n q u ~ r y Sect~on M ~ l t o n at Keynes, telephone 0908 221 166, telex 825777. such as symbols and implementing the standard, of necessary deta~ls size, type or grade des~gnatrons.E n q u ~ r ~ e s should be addressed t o the Publications Manager, BSI. L ~ n f o r d Wood, M ~ l t o n Keynes MK14 6LE. The number for telephone enqulrles IS 0906 220022 and for telex 825777. Contract requirements. A B r ~ t ~ Standard does not purport t o sh rnclude all the necessary provtstons of a contract Users o f Brltlsh Standards are resoons~ble thew correct anolicatlon for
British Standards Institution. Incorporated by Royal Charter, BSI the independent natlonal body for the preparation of Br~tish Standards. I t is the U K member of the lnternat~onal Organization for Standardization and U K sponsor of the Br~tish Natronal Committee o f the lnternat~onal Electrotechnrcal Commrss~on.
IS
In addition t o the preparation and promulgation of standards, BSI offers specialist services including the proviston of informat~on through the BSI Library and Standardline Database; Technrcal Help can be obta~ned from the to Exporters. and other servlces Adv~ce Enqu~ry Sect~on,BSI, M ~ l t o n Keynes MK14 6LE, telephone 0908 221 166. telex 825777 Copyraght. Users of B r ~ t ~ s h Standards are rem~nded that copyright subs~sts all BSI p u b l ~ c a t ~ o nN o part of thls publlcatlon may be In s t reproduced In any form w ~ t h o u the prlor permlsston ~nwrrtlng of BSI T h ~ s does not preclude the free use, ~n the course o f
lnformatlon on all BSI ,,ubllcatlons Is In the BS, catalogue ~ ~ p p l e m e n t e d m o n t h by BSI News w h ~ c h ava~lable o each IS t subscrrb~ng members of BSI and glves deta~ls f new p u b l ~ c a t ~ o n s . o revtslons, amendments and w ~ t h d r a w n standards Anv person who when m a k ~ n g of a B r ~ t ~ Standard, encounters an Inaccuracy or use sh amb~qurty,IS requested t o n o t ~ f y BSI w ~ t h o u delay In order that t the matter may be invest~yated and approprtate actton taken
Committees responsible for this British Standard

The preparation o f this British Standard was entrusted b y the Civil Engineering and Building Structures Standards Policy Committee (CSBI-) t o Technical Committee CSB127, upon which the following bodies were represented: British Constructional Steelwork Association L t d British Railways Board British Steel Industry Department o f the Environment (Property Services Agency) Department o f the Environment (Building Research Establishment) Department o f the Environment (Construction Industries Directorate) Health and Safety Executive lnstitution of Civil Engineers Institution of Structural Engineers Royal Institute o f British Architects Steel Construction Institute Welding Institute
Amendments issued since publication
British Standards Institution 2 Park Street London W1A 2BS . Telephone 071-629 9000 . Telex 266933
AMD 6972 Amendment No. 1 published and effective from 28 February 1992 to BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Structural use of steelwork in building Part 1. Code of practice for design in simple and continuous construction: hot rolled sections Revised text
AMD 6972 February 1992
Contents
In the l i s t of tables: (a) delete the title of table 4 and substitute 'Maximum thickness for adequate notch thickness of parts subject to applied tensile stress'; (b) delete the title of table 6 and substitute 'Design strengths,~,,'; (c) in items (a) to (dl of tables 21 t o 23, delete all references t o 'Grade 43 steel' and 'Grade 50 steel' and delete the brackets around the text quantifyingp,,.
Clause 1.2 Definitions

A r the end of the definitions clause, insert the following new definitions. '1.2.46 design grade. Designation used t o define specific performance requirements of the material for design purposes, in particular strength and toughness. 1.2.47 product grade. Designation used t o define mechanical and chemical properties and manufacturing requirements of the material a specified in BS 5950 : s Part 2.'
Clause 2.4.4.2 Maximum thickness

Delete the second sentence.
Table 4. Maximum thickness of parts subject to applied tensile stress

Delete the entire table and substitute the following new table.
Table 4. Maximum thickness for adequate notch toughness of parts subject to applied tensile stress (see notes 1 to 6)
Design grade Internal conditions External conditions NOTE 1. For sections with flanges the thickness is the flange thickness defined in the relevant British Standard.
K* 1
mm
K =2
K=1
mm
mm
mm
NOTE 2. The relevant structural steel standard may require Charpy values to be agreed for certain product grades and thicknesses. NOTE 3. Where no value is shown, the maximum thickness for adequate notch toughness may be assumed to be in excess of 100 mm. NOTE 4. The inclusion of a thickness limit in the table does not necessarily imply that steel of that thickness can be supplied t o that design grade in all product forms. NOTE 5. For design grades 43B(T) and 50B(T), verification of the impact properties of quality B by testing should be specified under option 7 of BS EN 10025 when the steel is ordered. NOTE 6. The maximum thickness values are based on a minimum Charpy value of 27 J" at the following test temperatures. Design grad- 43.50 and 55 Quality
A
43A 438 43B(T) 43C 430 43DD 43 E 43EE 50A 500 50B(T) 50C 500 50DD 50E 50EE 50F 55C 55EE 55 F WR5OA WR50B WR50C
25 25 30 60
50 50 60 -
15 15 20 40 90
30 30 40 80
25 25 32 60
20 20 25 45 100
40 40 50 90
12 12 16 30 70 100
Test temperature
c
B C D DD E EE F
Design grade WR 50 Quality
A
70
(no test) +20
0
-20
50 -
-0 3'
-40 -50 -60 Test temperature
OC
35
25
45 45 85
90 90
30 30 55
60 60
o
0 -15
B C
For Fe 510 OD, BS EN 10025 specifies 40 J at -20 which is accepted as equivalent to 27 J at -30 OC.
*c,
I
Clause 2.5.2 Durability

In the last line, delete 'to BS 4360'.
Clause 3.1.1 Strength of steel

Delete paragraph 1 and substitute the following. 'This standard covers the design of structures fabricated from weldable structural steels in designated design grades supplied to the appropriate product grade a given in s BS 5950 : Part 2. Other steels, excluding rimming steels, may also be used provided that due allowance be made for variations in properties, including ductility and weldability (see BS 5950 : Part 21.' In paragraph 2, line 4, delete 'BS 4360 (or agreed with steelmaker).'and substitute 'the appropriate product standard (see BS 5950 : Part 2).'
Table 6.Design strengths, p, , for steel t o BS 4360

Delete the entire table and substitute the following new table.
r
Table 6. Design strengths,py

h i g n grade Thickness. less than or equal to Sections, plates and hollow sections
P~
mm
N/mm2
43
16 40 63 80 100 16 40 63 80 100 16 25 40 63
275 265 255 24 5 235 355 34 5 335 325 315 450 430 400
50
55
Clause 3.1.3 Steel castings and forgings

Delete the l a s t sentence and substitute the following. 'Design strengths corresponding to hot rolled steel of design grade 43 may be adopted where no other information i s available.'
Clause 3.3.3Effective area at connections

In lines 3 and 4, delete 'where for steels complying with 'where:'. Insert 'design' before 'grade' in each of lines 5,6 and 7.
BS 4360:' and substitute
Table 7. Limiting w i d t h t o thickness ratios

Against the entry for 'Legs of single angl)and double angle members with components separated', in column 5, insert 'and' between the two rows of formulae.
Table 8. Strength reduction factors f o r slender elements

In the heading for column 3, delete 'Stress'and substitute 'Strength'. In the entry for 'Internal element of compression flange', in column 2, delete 'Build' and substitute 'Built'.
Clause 4.3.7.7 Equal flanged rolled sections

In paragraph 1, line 3, insert 'not' between 'are' and 'equal' In the definition of 'A', delete ' L E / r land substitute ' L E / r y l In the definition of 'r', delete 'r' and substitute 'r,'. In paragraph 4, line 4, insert 'the' between 'for' and 'value'.
Table 21. Critical shear strength, qCr

In the headings of items (a) to (d) of the table, delete all references to 'Grade 43 steel' and 'Grade 50 steel' and delete the brackets around the text quantifying p,,.
Table 22. Basic shear strength, qb

In the headings of items (a) to (d) of the table, delete all references to 'Grade 43 steel' and 'Grade 50 steel' and delete the brackets around the text quantifying p,.
Table 23. Flange dependent shear strength factor, q,

In the headings of items (a) to (d) of the table, delete all references to 'Grade 43 steel' and 'Grade 50 steel' and delete the brackets around the text quantifying p,.
Clause 4.1 2.4.2 General rules f o r empirical design

In item (a). line 2, delete 'grade 43 of BS 4360' and substitute 'design grade 43'.
AMD 6.972 February 1992
Clause 4.1 3.1 General

In paragraph 5, line 1, delete 'of grade 43A' and substitute 'of design grade 43A'. In line 3, delete 'Grade 43A baseplates' and substitute 'Baseplates of design grade 43A steel'.
Clause 5.3.3 Grades o f steel

Delete paragraph 1 and substitute the following. 'Steel for plastic design should comply wi*pll three of the following:' In item (c), line 2, delete 'BS 18' and substitute 'BS EN 10002-1'.
Clause 5.5.3.5.2 In item (31 of (a):

(a) immediately after the first formula, insert 'design' between 'for' and 'grade'; (b) immediately after the second formula, insert 'design' between 'for' and 'grade'
Table 33.Bearing strength of connected parts for ordinary bolts in clearance holes, p,,
In the overall heading of columns 1 to 3, delete 'Steel to BS 4360' and substitute * 'Design grade of steel'.
Table 34. Bearing strength of parts connected by parallel shank friction grip fasteners, p,,
In the overall heading of columns 1 to 3, delete 'Steel to BS 4360' and substitute 'Design grade of steel'.
Clause 6.6.5.1Design strength

In paragraph 1, line 3, delete 'on steel complying with BS 4360'
Table 36.Design strength, p,

In the heading of column 1, delete 'Grade of steel in BS 4360' and substitute 'Design grade of steel'.
Publications referred to
Delete the entries for BS 18 and BS 4360. To the bottom of the list, insert the following new entries.
'BS EN 10002-1 Metallic materials - Tensile testing Part 1 Method of test BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of nonalloy structural steels: Technical delivery conditions'

5950 Part 1-1990

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

5950 Part 1-1990

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

Structural use of steelwork in building

British Standards Institution

BEST COPY AVAILABLE

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

1.0 1.0.1 1.0.2 1.0.3 11 . 12 . 1.3 14 . 1.5 16 . 17 .

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

Page Section five. Continuous construction

4 5 1 1 Connection to flanges: stiffeners in ..

69 72 72 72 72 73 73 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 75 75 76 76 76 76 77 77 77 77 77 78 78 5.7 571 .. 5.7.2 5.7.3

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

2 Load factors and combinations

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section one

Section one. General

1.0.2 Overall stability

1.0.3 Accuracy of calculation

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section one

1.3 Major symbols

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section one

1.4 Other materials

1.5 Design documents

1.7 References to BS 5400

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section t w o

Section two. Limit state design

2.1 General principles and design methods

6 Vibration (e.9. wind

7 Repairable damage due to fatigue

3 Fracture due to fatigue

The overall factor in any design has to cover variability of:

Ym Loading: Yu Structural performance: y, In this code the material factor, y,,

A deta~led breakdown of y factors is given in appendix A.

2.1.2.5 Experimental verification. Where design of a

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section two

Table 2. Load factors and combinations

1.4 1.0 1.2 1.6 1.2 1.4 1.2 1.2

2.2.2 Dead, imposed and wind loading

Crane loading effects

2.2.3 Dynamic loads and impact effects

BS 6399 : Part 1 in the case

1.6 1.4 1.6 1.4 1.2

2.3 Temperature effects

2.4 Ultimate limit states

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section two

Y , is the minimum yield strength of the material (in ~/mrn');

K i s determined from table 3.

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 two

"C (no test)

Lksign grado WR 50 Quality

Test temperature "C

2.4.5.2 Requirements for all buildings. Every b u i l d i n g

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section two

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section two

2 5 Serviceability limit states

Span1360 Span1200 See 4.12.2

Height1300 Height of storey under consideration1300

NOTE 1. O n low-pitched and flat roofs the possibility of ponding

BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 Section three

Section three. Properties of materials and section properties

3.2 Welds and fasteners

3.2.2 Ordinary bolts, nuts and washers

3 2 3 Friction grip fasteners ..